1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2020-05-22.11} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 9% 10% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 11% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 12% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 13% License, or (at your option) any later version. 14% 15% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 16% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 17% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 18% General Public License for more details. 19% 20% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 21% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 22% 23% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 24% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 25% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 26% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 27% 28% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 29% reports; you can get the latest version from: 30% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 31% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 32% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 33% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 34% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 35% 36% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include a 37% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 38% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 39% 40% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 41% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 42% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 43% tex foo.texi 44% texindex foo.?? 45% tex foo.texi 46% tex foo.texi 47% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 48% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 49% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 50% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 51% 52% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 53% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 54% full Texinfo distribution. 55% 56% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 57 58 59\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 60 61% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 62% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 63% they might have appeared in the input file name. 64\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 65 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 66 67% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 68% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 69\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 70 71\chardef\other=12 72 73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75\let\+ = \relax 76 77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78\let\ptexb=\b 79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80\let\ptexc=\c 81\let\ptexcomma=\, 82\let\ptexdot=\. 83\let\ptexdots=\dots 84\let\ptexend=\end 85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86\let\ptexexclam=\! 87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88\let\ptexgtr=> 89\let\ptexhat=^ 90\let\ptexi=\i 91\let\ptexindent=\indent 92\let\ptexinsert=\insert 93\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94\let\ptexless=< 95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97\let\ptexplus=+ 98\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 99\let\ptexrbrace=\} 100\let\ptexslash=\/ 101\let\ptexsp=\sp 102\let\ptexstar=\* 103\let\ptexsup=\sup 104\let\ptext=\t 105\let\ptextop=\top 106{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 107 108% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 109% starts a new line in the output. 110\newlinechar = `^^J 111 112% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 113% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 114% 115\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 116 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 117\else 118 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 119\fi 120 121% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 122\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 123\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 124\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 125\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 126\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 127\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 131\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 132\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 133\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 136\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 137\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 139\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 140\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 141\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 142% 143\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 155% 156\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 157\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 161 162% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 163\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 164 165% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 166\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 167 168\chardef\dashChar = `\- 169\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 170\chardef\underChar = `\_ 171 172% Ignore a token. 173% 174\def\gobble#1{} 175 176% The following is used inside several \edef's. 177\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 178 179% Hyphenation fixes. 180\hyphenation{ 181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 186 spell-ing spell-ings 187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 188 wide-spread wrap-around 189} 190 191% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 192% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 193% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 194% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 195% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 196% 197\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 198\def\loggingall{% 199 \tracingstats2 200 \tracingpages1 201 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 202 \tracingparagraphs1 203 \tracingoutput1 204 \tracingmacros2 205 \tracingrestores1 206 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 207 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 208 \tracingscantokens1 209 \tracingifs1 210 \tracinggroups1 211 \tracingnesting2 212 \tracingassigns1 213 \fi 214 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 215 \errorcontextlines16 216}% 217 218% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 219% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 220% after all. 221% 222\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 223\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 224 225% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 226% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 227% 228\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 229 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 230\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 231 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 232\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 233 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 234 235% Output routine 236% 237 238% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 239% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 240% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 241% 242\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 243 244\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 245\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 246 247% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 248% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 249% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 250% 251% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 252% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 253% 254% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 255% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 256% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 257 258% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 259% mark before the section break, and one after. 260% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs, 261% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs. 262% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 263% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 264% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 265% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 266% 267% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 268\def\domark{% 269 \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}% 270 \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}% 271 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 272 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 273 \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}% 274 \mark{% 275 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 276 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 277 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 278 }% 279} 280 281% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 282% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 283% 284% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 285% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 286% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 287% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 288% first @chapter. 289\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 290 \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi 291 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 292} 293\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 294\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi} 295 296% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 297\def\currentchapterdefs{} 298\def\currentsectiondefs{} 299\def\currentsection{} 300\def\prevchapterdefs{} 301\def\prevsectiondefs{} 302\def\currentcolordefs{} 303 304% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 305\newdimen\bindingoffset 306\newdimen\normaloffset 307\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 308 309% Main output routine. 310% 311\chardef\PAGE = 255 312\newtoks\defaultoutput 313\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 314\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 315 316\newbox\headlinebox 317\newbox\footlinebox 318 319% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine 320% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This 321% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading 322% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of 323% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually 324% \shipout a page. 325% 326% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and 327% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page 328% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown 329% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.) 330% 331\newtoks\savedtopmark 332\newif\iftopmarksaved 333\topmarksavedtrue 334\def\savetopmark{% 335 \iftopmarksaved\else 336 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}% 337 \global\topmarksavedtrue 338 \fi 339} 340 341% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 342% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 343% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 344% to the auxiliary files. 345% 346\def\onepageout#1{% 347 \hoffset=\normaloffset 348 % 349 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 350 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 351 % 352 \checkchapterpage 353 % 354 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 355 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 356 % values in \headline and \footline. 357 % 358 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 359 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 360 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 361 \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 362 % 363 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 364 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 365 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 366 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}% 367 % 368 {% 369 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 370 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 371 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 372 % before the \shipout runs. 373 % 374 \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 375 \turnoffactive 376 \shipout\vbox{% 377 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 378 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 379 % 380 \unvbox\headlinebox 381 \pagebody{#1}% 382 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 383 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 384 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 385 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 386 \vskip 24pt 387 \unvbox\footlinebox 388 \fi 389 % 390 }% 391 }% 392 \global\topmarksavedfalse 393 \advancepageno 394 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 395} 396 397\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 398 399% Main part of page, including any footnotes 400\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 401{\catcode`\@ =11 402\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 403% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 404\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 405 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 406\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 407\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 408\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 409} 410 411% Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings. 412\newif\ifchapterpage 413\def\checkchapterpage{% 414 % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page 415 \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi 416 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 417 % 418 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 419 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 420 % 421 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 422 \chapterpagefalse 423 \else 424 \chapterpagetrue 425 \fi 426} 427 428% Argument parsing 429 430% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 431% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 432% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 433% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 434% 435\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 436\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 437 \def\argtorun{#2}% 438 \begingroup 439 \obeylines 440 \spaceisspace 441 #1% 442 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 443} 444 445{\obeylines % 446 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 447 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 448 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 449 }% 450} 451 452% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to 453% \argcheckspaces. 454\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 455\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 456 457% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 458% 459% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 460% @end itemize @c foo 461% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 462% by \finishparsearg. 463% 464\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 465\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 466\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 467 \def\temp{#3}% 468 \ifx\temp\empty 469 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 470 \let\temp\finishparsearg 471 \else 472 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 473 \fi 474 % Put the space token in: 475 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 476} 477 478% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 479% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 480% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 481% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 482% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 483% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 484% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 485% 486% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 487% 488\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 489 490 491% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 492% 493% \parseargdef\foo{...} 494% is roughly equivalent to 495% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 496% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 497\def\parseargdef#1{% 498 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 499} 500\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 501 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 502 \def#1##1% 503} 504 505% Several utility definitions with active space: 506{ 507 \obeyspaces 508 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 509 510 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 511 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 512 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 513 % should produce a line of output anyway. 514 % 515 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 516 517 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 518 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 519 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 520 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 521} 522 523 524\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 525 526% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 527% 528% \envdef\foo{...} 529% \def\Efoo{...} 530% 531% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 532% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 533% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 534% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 535% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 536% 537% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 538% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 539% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 540% special case.) 541 542 543% At run-time, environments start with this: 544\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 545% initialize 546\let\thisenv\empty 547 548% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 549\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 550\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 551 552% Check whether we're in the right environment: 553\def\checkenv#1{% 554 \def\temp{#1}% 555 \ifx\thisenv\temp 556 \else 557 \badenverr 558 \fi 559} 560 561% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 562\def\badenverr{% 563 \errhelp = \EMsimple 564 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 565 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 566} 567\def\inenvironment#1{% 568 \ifx#1\empty 569 outside of any environment% 570 \else 571 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 572 \fi 573} 574 575% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 576% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 577% 578\parseargdef\end{% 579 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 580 \else 581 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 582 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 583 \csname E#1\endcsname 584 \endgroup 585 \fi 586} 587 588\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 589 590 591% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 592% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 593% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 594% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 595% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 596{\catcode`@ = 11 597 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 598 % if the definition is written into an index file. 599 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 600 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 601} 602 603% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 604\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 605 606% @* forces a line break. 607\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 608 609% @/ allows a line break. 610\let\/=\allowbreak 611 612% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 613\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 614 615% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 616\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 617 618% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 619\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 620 621% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 622% 623\def\onword{on} 624\def\offword{off} 625% 626\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 627 \def\temp{#1}% 628 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 629 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 630 \else 631 \errhelp = \EMsimple 632 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 633 \fi\fi 634} 635 636% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 637% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 638% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 639\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 640 641% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 642% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 643% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 644% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 645% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 646% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 647% the text is small, which looks bad. 648% 649% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 650% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 651% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 652% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 653% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 654% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 655% 656\newbox\groupbox 657\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 658% 659\envdef\group{% 660 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 661 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 662 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 663 \fi 664 \startsavinginserts 665 % 666 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 667 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 668 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 669 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 670 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 671 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 672 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 673 \comment 674} 675% 676% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 677% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 678% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 679% above. But it's pretty close. 680\def\Egroup{% 681 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 682 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 683 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 684 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 685 \egroup % End the \vtop. 686 \addgroupbox 687 \prevdepth = \dimen1 688 \checkinserts 689} 690 691\def\addgroupbox{ 692 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 693 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 694 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 695 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 696 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 697 % group, force a page break. 698 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 699 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 700 \page 701 \fi 702 \fi 703 \box\groupbox 704} 705 706% 707% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 708% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 709% 710\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 711group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 712where each line of input produces a line of output.} 713 714% @need space-in-mils 715% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 716 717\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 718 719\parseargdef\need{% 720 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 721 % paragraph. 722 \par 723 % 724 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 725 \dimen0 = #1\mil 726 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 727 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 728 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 729 % 730 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 731 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 732 % And a page break here is fine. 733 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 734 % 735 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 736 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 737 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 738 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 739 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 740 % 741 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 742 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 743 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 744 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 745 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 746 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 747 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 748 \penalty9999 749 % 750 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 751 \kern -#1\mil 752 % 753 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 754 \nobreak 755 \fi 756} 757 758% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 759 760\let\br = \par 761 762% @page forces the start of a new page. 763% 764\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 765 766% @exdent text.... 767% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 768 769% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 770% That's how much \exdent should take out. 771\newskip\exdentamount 772 773% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 774\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 775 776% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 777\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 778 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 779 780% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 781% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 782% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 783% 784\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 785\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 786% 787\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 788 \nobreak 789 \kern-\strutdepth 790 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 791 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 792 \vss 793 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 794 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 795 \ifx#1l% 796 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 797 \else 798 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 799 \fi 800 \null 801 }% 802}} 803\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 804\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 805% 806% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 807% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 808% else use TEXT for both). 809% 810\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 811\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 812 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 813 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 814 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 815 \def\righttext{#2}% 816 \else 817 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 818 \def\righttext{#1}% 819 \fi 820 % 821 \ifodd\pageno 822 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 823 \else 824 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 825 \fi 826 \temp 827} 828 829% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 830% 831\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 832\def\includezzz#1{% 833 \pushthisfilestack 834 \def\thisfile{#1}% 835 {% 836 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 837 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 838 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 839 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 840 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 841 % 842 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 843 % definitions, etc. 844 \expandafter 845 }\temp 846 \popthisfilestack 847} 848\def\filenamecatcodes{% 849 \catcode`\\=\other 850 \catcode`~=\other 851 \catcode`^=\other 852 \catcode`_=\other 853 \catcode`|=\other 854 \catcode`<=\other 855 \catcode`>=\other 856 \catcode`+=\other 857 \catcode`-=\other 858 \catcode`\`=\other 859 \catcode`\'=\other 860} 861 862\def\pushthisfilestack{% 863 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 864} 865\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 866 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 867} 868\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 869 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 870} 871 872\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 873\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 874 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 875% 876\def\thisfile{} 877 878% @center line 879% outputs that line, centered. 880% 881\parseargdef\center{% 882 \ifhmode 883 \let\centersub\centerH 884 \else 885 \let\centersub\centerV 886 \fi 887 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 888 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 889} 890\def\centerH#1{{% 891 \hfil\break 892 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 893 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 894 \line{#1}% 895 \break 896}} 897% 898\newcount\centerpenalty 899\def\centerV#1{% 900 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 901 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 902 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 903 % prevent a page break here. 904 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 905 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 906 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 907 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 908} 909 910% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 911% 912\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 913 914% @comment ...line which is ignored... 915% @c is the same as @comment 916% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 917 918 919\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 920\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 921\cxxx} 922{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 923% 924\let\comment\c 925 926% @paragraphindent NCHARS 927% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 928% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 929% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 930% 931\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 932\def\noneword{none} 933% 934\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 935 \def\temp{#1}% 936 \ifx\temp\asisword 937 \else 938 \ifx\temp\noneword 939 \defaultparindent = 0pt 940 \else 941 \defaultparindent = #1em 942 \fi 943 \fi 944 \parindent = \defaultparindent 945} 946 947% @exampleindent NCHARS 948% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 949% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 950% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 951\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 952 \def\temp{#1}% 953 \ifx\temp\asisword 954 \else 955 \ifx\temp\noneword 956 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 957 \else 958 \lispnarrowing = #1em 959 \fi 960 \fi 961} 962 963% @firstparagraphindent WORD 964% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 965% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 966% paragraphs. 967% 968% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 969% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 970% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 971% By default, we suppress indentation. 972% 973\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 974\def\insertword{insert} 975% 976\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 977 \def\temp{#1}% 978 \ifx\temp\noneword 979 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 980 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 981 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 982 \else 983 \errhelp = \EMsimple 984 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 985 \fi\fi 986} 987 988% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 989% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 990% 991% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 992% paragraph. 993% 994\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 995 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 996 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 997 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 998} 999% 1000\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1001 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1002 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1003 \global\everypar = {}% 1004} 1005 1006 1007% @refill is a no-op. 1008\let\refill=\relax 1009 1010% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1011\let\setfilename=\comment 1012 1013% @bye. 1014\outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1015 1016 1017\message{pdf,} 1018% adobe `portable' document format 1019\newcount\tempnum 1020\newcount\lnkcount 1021\newtoks\filename 1022\newcount\filenamelength 1023\newcount\pgn 1024\newtoks\toksA 1025\newtoks\toksB 1026\newtoks\toksC 1027\newtoks\toksD 1028\newbox\boxA 1029\newbox\boxB 1030\newcount\countA 1031\newif\ifpdf 1032\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1033 1034% 1035% For LuaTeX 1036% 1037 1038\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1039\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1040 1041\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1042\else 1043 % Use Unicode destination names 1044 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1045 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1046 \begingroup 1047 \catcode`\%=12 1048 \directlua{ 1049 function UTF16oct(str) 1050 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1051 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1052 if c < 0x10000 then 1053 tex.sprint( 1054 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1055 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1056 math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256))) 1057 else 1058 c = c - 0x10000 1059 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1060 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1061 tex.sprint( 1062 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1063 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1064 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1065 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1066 math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256), 1067 math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256))) 1068 end 1069 end 1070 end 1071 } 1072 \endgroup 1073 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1074 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1075 \begingroup 1076 \directlua{ 1077 function PDFescstr(str) 1078 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1079 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1080 tex.sprint(-2, 1081 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1082 c)) 1083 else 1084 tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c)) 1085 end 1086 end 1087 end 1088 } 1089 % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12 1090 % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See 1091 % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html 1092 % 1093 \endgroup 1094 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1095 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1096 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1097 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1098 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1099 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1100 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1101 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1102 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1103 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1104 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1105 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1106 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1107 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1108 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1109 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1110 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1111 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1112 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1113 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1114 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1115 \fi 1116\fi 1117 1118% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1119% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1120\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1121\else 1122 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1123 \else 1124 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1125 \else 1126 \pdftrue 1127 \fi 1128 \fi 1129\fi 1130 1131\newif\ifpdforxetex 1132\pdforxetexfalse 1133\ifpdf 1134 \pdforxetextrue 1135\fi 1136\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else 1137 \pdforxetextrue 1138\fi 1139 1140 1141% Output page labels information. 1142% See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1. 1143\ifpdf 1144\def\pagelabels{% 1145 \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}% 1146 \edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}% 1147 \edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}% 1148 % 1149 % Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates. 1150 % (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is 1151 % a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.) 1152 % 1153 \ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi 1154 \ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}% 1155 \else 1156 \ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi 1157 \fi 1158 % 1159 \ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount 1160 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax 1161 \else 1162 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax 1163 \fi 1164} 1165\else 1166 \let\pagelabels\relax 1167\fi 1168 1169\newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0 1170\newcount\romancount \romancount=0 1171\newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0 1172\ifpdf 1173 \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno 1174 \def\advancepageno{% 1175 \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1 1176 } 1177\fi 1178 1179 1180% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1181% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1182% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1183% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1184% 1185% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1186% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1187% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1188% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1189% do this reliably, so we use it. 1190 1191% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1192% which we \xdef. 1193\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1194 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1195 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1196 % Many times it won't matter. 1197 \xdef#1{#1}% 1198 \else 1199 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1200 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1201 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1202 \fi 1203} 1204\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1205 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1206 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1207 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1208 \else 1209 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1210 \fi 1211} 1212 1213\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1214with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1215be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1216output) for that.)} 1217 1218\ifpdf 1219 % 1220 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1221 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1222 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1223 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1224 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1225 % black by default, though. 1226 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1227 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1228 % 1229 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1230 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1231 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1232 % 1233 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1234 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1235 \def\setcolor#1{% 1236 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1237 \domark 1238 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1239 } 1240 % 1241 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1242 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1243 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1244 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1245 % 1246 \def\makefootline{% 1247 \baselineskip24pt 1248 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1249 } 1250 % 1251 \def\makeheadline{% 1252 \vbox to 0pt{% 1253 \vskip-22.5pt 1254 \line{% 1255 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1256 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1257 \getcolormarks 1258 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1259 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1260 }% 1261 \vss 1262 }% 1263 \nointerlineskip 1264 } 1265 % 1266 % 1267 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1268 % 1269 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1270 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1271 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1272 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1273 % 1274 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1275 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1276 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1277 % bitmap. 1278 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1279 \begingroup 1280 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1281 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1282 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1283 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1284 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1285 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1286 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1287 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1288 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1289 \fi 1290 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1291 \fi 1292 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1293 \fi 1294 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1295 \fi 1296 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1297 \fi 1298 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1299 \fi 1300 \closein 1 1301 \endgroup 1302 % 1303 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1304 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1305 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1306 \immediate\pdfimage 1307 \else 1308 \immediate\pdfximage 1309 \fi 1310 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1311 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1312 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1313 #1.\pdfimgext 1314 \else 1315 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1316 \fi 1317 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1318 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1319 \fi} 1320 % 1321 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1322 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1323 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1324 \indexnofonts 1325 \makevalueexpandable 1326 \turnoffactive 1327 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1328 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1329 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1330 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1331 \else 1332 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1333 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1334 \else 1335 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1336 \passthroughcharsfalse 1337 \fi 1338 \fi 1339 \else 1340 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1341 \passthroughcharsfalse 1342 \fi 1343 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1344 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1345 }} 1346 % 1347 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1348 \indexnofonts 1349 \makevalueexpandable 1350 \turnoffactive 1351 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1352 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1353 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1354 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1355 \passthroughcharstrue 1356 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1357 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1358 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1359 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1360 \else 1361 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1362 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1363 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1364 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1365 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1366 % Use ASCII approximations. 1367 \passthroughcharsfalse 1368 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1369 \else 1370 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1371 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1372 \passthroughcharstrue 1373 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1374 \fi 1375 \else 1376 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1377 % Use ASCII approximations. 1378 \passthroughcharsfalse 1379 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1380 \fi 1381 \fi 1382 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1383 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1384 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1385 }} 1386 % 1387 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1388 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1389 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1390 } 1391 % 1392 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1393 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1394 % 1395 % by default, use black for everything. 1396 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1397 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1398 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1399 % 1400 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1401 % come from Petr Olsak 1402 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1403 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1404 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1405 \advance\tempnum by 1 1406 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1407 % 1408 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1409 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1410 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1411 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1412 % #4 is the page number 1413 % 1414 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1415 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1416 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1417 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1418 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1419 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1420 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1421 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1422 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1423 \fi 1424 % 1425 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1426 } 1427 % 1428 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1429 \begingroup 1430 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1431 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1432 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1433 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1434 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1435 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1436 }% 1437 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1438 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1439 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1440 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1441 }% 1442 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1443 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1444 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1445 }% 1446 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1447 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1448 }% 1449 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1450 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1451 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1452 % 1453 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1454 % al. a second time, below. 1455 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1456 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1457 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1458 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1459 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1460 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1461 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1462 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1463 \readdatafile{toc}% 1464 % 1465 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1466 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1467 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1468 % 1469 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1470 % 1471 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1472 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1473 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1474 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1475 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1476 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1477 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1478 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1479 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1480 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1481 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1482 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1483 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1484 % 1485 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1486 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1487 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1488 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1489 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1490 % 1491 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1492 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1493 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1494 % we use for the index sort strings. 1495 % 1496 \indexnofonts 1497 \setupdatafile 1498 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1499 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1500 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1501 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1502 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1503 \input \tocreadfilename 1504 \endgroup 1505 } 1506 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1507 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1508 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1509 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1510 ] 1511 % 1512 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1513 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1514 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1515 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1516 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1517 \fi 1518 \nextsp} 1519 \def\getfilename#1{% 1520 \filenamelength=0 1521 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1522 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1523 \edef\temp{#1}% 1524 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1525 } 1526 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1527 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1528 \else 1529 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1530 \fi 1531 % make a live url in pdf output. 1532 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1533 \begingroup 1534 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1535 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1536 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1537 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1538 % 1539 \normalturnoffactive 1540 \def\@{@}% 1541 \let\/=\empty 1542 \makevalueexpandable 1543 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1544 % special-casing \var here? 1545 \def\var##1{##1}% 1546 % 1547 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1548 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1549 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1550 \endgroup} 1551 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1552 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1553 % entry. 1554 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1555 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1556 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1557 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1558 \def\maketoks{% 1559 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1560 \ifx\first0\adn0 1561 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1562 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1563 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1564 \else 1565 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1566 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1567 \let\next=\maketoks 1568 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1569 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1570 \fi 1571 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1572 \next} 1573 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1574 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1575 \def\pdflink#1{% 1576 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1577 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1578 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1579\else 1580 % non-pdf mode 1581 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1582 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1583 \let\endlink = \relax 1584 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1585 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1586 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1587\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1588 1589% 1590% For XeTeX 1591% 1592\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1593\else 1594 % 1595 % XeTeX version check 1596 % 1597 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1598 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1599 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1600 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1601 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1602 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1603 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1604 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1605 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1606 \else 1607 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1608 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1609 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1610 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1611 % 1612 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1613 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1614 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1615 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1616 \fi 1617 % 1618 % Color support 1619 % 1620 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1621 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1622 % 1623 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1624 % 1625 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1626 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1627 \def\setcolor#1{% 1628 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1629 \domark 1630 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1631 } 1632 % 1633 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1634 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1635 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1636 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1637 % 1638 \def\makefootline{% 1639 \baselineskip24pt 1640 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1641 } 1642 % 1643 \def\makeheadline{% 1644 \vbox to 0pt{% 1645 \vskip-22.5pt 1646 \line{% 1647 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1648 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1649 \getcolormarks 1650 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1651 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1652 }% 1653 \vss 1654 }% 1655 \nointerlineskip 1656 } 1657 % 1658 % PDF outline support 1659 % 1660 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1661 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1662 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1663 } 1664 % 1665 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1666 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1667 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1668 \indexnofonts 1669 \makevalueexpandable 1670 \turnoffactive 1671 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1672 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1673 \else 1674 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1675 \passthroughcharsfalse 1676 \fi 1677 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1678 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1679 }} 1680 % 1681 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1682 \turnoffactive 1683 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1684 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1685 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1686 % So we do not convert. 1687 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1688 }} 1689 % 1690 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1691 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1692 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1693 } 1694 % 1695 % by default, use black for everything. 1696 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1697 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1698 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1699 % 1700 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1701 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1702 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1703 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1704 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1705 \fi 1706 % 1707 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1708 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1709 } 1710 % 1711 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1712 \begingroup 1713 % 1714 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1715 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1716 % 1717 % We use node names as destinations. 1718 % 1719 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1720 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1721 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1722 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1723 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1724 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1725 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1726 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1727 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1728 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1729 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1730 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1731 % 1732 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1733 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1734 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1735 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1736 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1737 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1738 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1739 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1740 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1741 % 1742 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1743 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1744 % 1745 \indexnofonts 1746 \setupdatafile 1747 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1748 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1749 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1750 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1751 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1752 \input \tocreadfilename 1753 \endgroup 1754 } 1755 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1756 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1757 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1758 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1759 ] 1760 1761 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1762 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1763 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1764 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1765 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1766 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1767% 1768 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1769 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1770 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1771 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1772 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1773 \fi 1774 \nextsp} 1775 \def\getfilename#1{% 1776 \filenamelength=0 1777 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1778 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1779 \edef\temp{#1}% 1780 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1781 } 1782 % make a live url in pdf output. 1783 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1784 \begingroup 1785 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1786 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1787 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1788 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1789 % 1790 \normalturnoffactive 1791 \def\@{@}% 1792 \let\/=\empty 1793 \makevalueexpandable 1794 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1795 % special-casing \var here? 1796 \def\var##1{##1}% 1797 % 1798 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1799 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1800 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1801 \endgroup} 1802 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1803 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1804 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1805 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1806 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1807 \def\maketoks{% 1808 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1809 \ifx\first0\adn0 1810 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1811 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1812 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1813 \else 1814 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1815 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1816 \let\next=\maketoks 1817 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1818 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1819 \fi 1820 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1821 \next} 1822 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1823 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1824 \def\pdflink#1{% 1825 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1826 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1827 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1828 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1829% 1830 % 1831 % @image support 1832 % 1833 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1834 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1835 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1836 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1837 % 1838 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1839 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1840 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1841 % bitmap. 1842 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1843 \begingroup 1844 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1845 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1846 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1847 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1848 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1849 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1850 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1851 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1852 \fi 1853 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1854 \fi 1855 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1856 \fi 1857 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1858 \fi 1859 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1860 \fi 1861 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1862 \fi 1863 \closein 1 1864 \endgroup 1865 % 1866 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1867 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1868 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1869 \else 1870 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1871 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1872 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1873 \else 1874 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1875 \fi 1876 \fi 1877 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1878 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1879 } 1880\fi 1881 1882 1883% 1884\message{fonts,} 1885 1886% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1887% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1888% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1889% 1890\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1891\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1892\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1893% 1894% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1895\def\baselinefactor{1} 1896% 1897\newdimen\textleading 1898\def\setleading#1{% 1899 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1900 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1901 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1902 \normalbaselines 1903 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1904 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1905 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1906 }% 1907} 1908 1909% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1910% 1911% do nothing with this by default. 1912\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1913\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1914\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1915 1916% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1917% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1918% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1919\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1920 \begingroup 1921 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1922 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1923%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1924%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1925%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1926%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1927%%Version: 1.000 1928%%EndComments 1929/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 193012 dict begin 1931begincmap 1932/CIDSystemInfo 1933<< /Registry (TeX) 1934/Ordering (OT1) 1935/Supplement 0 1936>> def 1937/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1938/CMapType 2 def 19391 begincodespacerange 1940<00> <7F> 1941endcodespacerange 19428 beginbfrange 1943<00> <01> <0393> 1944<09> <0A> <03A8> 1945<23> <26> <0023> 1946<28> <3B> <0028> 1947<3F> <5B> <003F> 1948<5D> <5E> <005D> 1949<61> <7A> <0061> 1950<7B> <7C> <2013> 1951endbfrange 195240 beginbfchar 1953<02> <0398> 1954<03> <039B> 1955<04> <039E> 1956<05> <03A0> 1957<06> <03A3> 1958<07> <03D2> 1959<08> <03A6> 1960<0B> <00660066> 1961<0C> <00660069> 1962<0D> <0066006C> 1963<0E> <006600660069> 1964<0F> <00660066006C> 1965<10> <0131> 1966<11> <0237> 1967<12> <0060> 1968<13> <00B4> 1969<14> <02C7> 1970<15> <02D8> 1971<16> <00AF> 1972<17> <02DA> 1973<18> <00B8> 1974<19> <00DF> 1975<1A> <00E6> 1976<1B> <0153> 1977<1C> <00F8> 1978<1D> <00C6> 1979<1E> <0152> 1980<1F> <00D8> 1981<21> <0021> 1982<22> <201D> 1983<27> <2019> 1984<3C> <00A1> 1985<3D> <003D> 1986<3E> <00BF> 1987<5C> <201C> 1988<5F> <02D9> 1989<60> <2018> 1990<7D> <02DD> 1991<7E> <007E> 1992<7F> <00A8> 1993endbfchar 1994endcmap 1995CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1996end 1997end 1998%%EndResource 1999%%EOF 2000 }\endgroup 2001 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 2002 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2003 }% 2004% 2005% \cmapOT1IT 2006 \begingroup 2007 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2008 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2009%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2010%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2011%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 2012%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 2013%%Version: 1.000 2014%%EndComments 2015/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 201612 dict begin 2017begincmap 2018/CIDSystemInfo 2019<< /Registry (TeX) 2020/Ordering (OT1IT) 2021/Supplement 0 2022>> def 2023/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 2024/CMapType 2 def 20251 begincodespacerange 2026<00> <7F> 2027endcodespacerange 20288 beginbfrange 2029<00> <01> <0393> 2030<09> <0A> <03A8> 2031<25> <26> <0025> 2032<28> <3B> <0028> 2033<3F> <5B> <003F> 2034<5D> <5E> <005D> 2035<61> <7A> <0061> 2036<7B> <7C> <2013> 2037endbfrange 203842 beginbfchar 2039<02> <0398> 2040<03> <039B> 2041<04> <039E> 2042<05> <03A0> 2043<06> <03A3> 2044<07> <03D2> 2045<08> <03A6> 2046<0B> <00660066> 2047<0C> <00660069> 2048<0D> <0066006C> 2049<0E> <006600660069> 2050<0F> <00660066006C> 2051<10> <0131> 2052<11> <0237> 2053<12> <0060> 2054<13> <00B4> 2055<14> <02C7> 2056<15> <02D8> 2057<16> <00AF> 2058<17> <02DA> 2059<18> <00B8> 2060<19> <00DF> 2061<1A> <00E6> 2062<1B> <0153> 2063<1C> <00F8> 2064<1D> <00C6> 2065<1E> <0152> 2066<1F> <00D8> 2067<21> <0021> 2068<22> <201D> 2069<23> <0023> 2070<24> <00A3> 2071<27> <2019> 2072<3C> <00A1> 2073<3D> <003D> 2074<3E> <00BF> 2075<5C> <201C> 2076<5F> <02D9> 2077<60> <2018> 2078<7D> <02DD> 2079<7E> <007E> 2080<7F> <00A8> 2081endbfchar 2082endcmap 2083CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2084end 2085end 2086%%EndResource 2087%%EOF 2088 }\endgroup 2089 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2090 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2091 }% 2092% 2093% \cmapOT1TT 2094 \begingroup 2095 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2096 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2097%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2098%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2099%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2100%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2101%%Version: 1.000 2102%%EndComments 2103/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 210412 dict begin 2105begincmap 2106/CIDSystemInfo 2107<< /Registry (TeX) 2108/Ordering (OT1TT) 2109/Supplement 0 2110>> def 2111/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2112/CMapType 2 def 21131 begincodespacerange 2114<00> <7F> 2115endcodespacerange 21165 beginbfrange 2117<00> <01> <0393> 2118<09> <0A> <03A8> 2119<21> <26> <0021> 2120<28> <5F> <0028> 2121<61> <7E> <0061> 2122endbfrange 212332 beginbfchar 2124<02> <0398> 2125<03> <039B> 2126<04> <039E> 2127<05> <03A0> 2128<06> <03A3> 2129<07> <03D2> 2130<08> <03A6> 2131<0B> <2191> 2132<0C> <2193> 2133<0D> <0027> 2134<0E> <00A1> 2135<0F> <00BF> 2136<10> <0131> 2137<11> <0237> 2138<12> <0060> 2139<13> <00B4> 2140<14> <02C7> 2141<15> <02D8> 2142<16> <00AF> 2143<17> <02DA> 2144<18> <00B8> 2145<19> <00DF> 2146<1A> <00E6> 2147<1B> <0153> 2148<1C> <00F8> 2149<1D> <00C6> 2150<1E> <0152> 2151<1F> <00D8> 2152<20> <2423> 2153<27> <2019> 2154<60> <2018> 2155<7F> <00A8> 2156endbfchar 2157endcmap 2158CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2159end 2160end 2161%%EndResource 2162%%EOF 2163 }\endgroup 2164 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2165 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2166 }% 2167\fi\fi 2168 2169 2170% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2171% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2172% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2173% Example: 2174% #1 = \textrm 2175% #2 = \rmshape 2176% #3 = 10 2177% #4 = \mainmagstep 2178% #5 = OT1 2179% 2180\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2181 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2182 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2183} 2184% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2185\let\cmap\gobble 2186% 2187% (end of cmaps) 2188 2189% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2190% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2191% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2192\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2193\def\fontprefix{cm} 2194\fi 2195% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2196\def\rmshape{r} 2197\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2198\def\bfshape{b} 2199\def\bxshape{bx} 2200\def\ttshape{tt} 2201\def\ttbshape{tt} 2202\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2203\def\itshape{ti} 2204\def\itbshape{bxti} 2205\def\slshape{sl} 2206\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2207\def\sfshape{ss} 2208\def\sfbshape{ss} 2209\def\scshape{csc} 2210\def\scbshape{csc} 2211 2212% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2213% 2214\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2215% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2216\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2217\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2218\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2219\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2220\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2221\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2222\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2223\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2224\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2225\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2226\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2227\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2228\def\textecsize{1095} 2229 2230% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2231\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2232\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2233\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2234\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2235\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2236\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2237 2238% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2239\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2240\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2241\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2242\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2243\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2244\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2245\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2246\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2247\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2248\font\smalli=cmmi9 2249\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2250\def\smallecsize{0900} 2251 2252% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2253\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2254\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2255\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2256\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2257\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2258\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2259\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2260\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2261\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2262\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2263\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2264\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2265 2266% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2267\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2268\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2269\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2270\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2271\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2272\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2273\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2274\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2275\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2276\font\seveni=cmmi7 2277\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2278\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2279 2280% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2281\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2282\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2283\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2284\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2285\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2286\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2287\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2288\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2289\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2290\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2291\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2292\def\titleecsize{2074} 2293 2294% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2295\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2296\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2297\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2298\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2299\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2300\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2301\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2302\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2303\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2304\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2305\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2306\def\chapecsize{1728} 2307 2308% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2309\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2310\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2311\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2312\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2313\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2314\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2315\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2316\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2317\let\secbf\secrm 2318\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2319\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2320\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2321\def\sececsize{1440} 2322 2323% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2324\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2325\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2326\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2327\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2328\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2329\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2330\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2331\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2332\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2333\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2334\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2335\def\ssececsize{1200} 2336 2337% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2338\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2339\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2340\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2341\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2342\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2343\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2344\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2345\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2346\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2347\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2348\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2349\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2350 2351\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2352\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2353\rm 2354} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2355 2356 2357% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2358% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2359% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2360% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2361% 2362\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2363% Text fonts (10pt). 2364\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2365\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2366\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2367\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2368\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2369\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2370\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2371\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2372\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2373\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2374\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2375\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2376\def\textecsize{1000} 2377 2378% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2379\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2380\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2381\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2382\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2383\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2384\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2385 2386% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2387\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2388\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2389\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2390\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2391\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2392\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2393\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2394\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2395\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2396\font\smalli=cmmi9 2397\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2398\def\smallecsize{0900} 2399 2400% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2401\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2402\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2403\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2404\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2405\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2406\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2407\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2408\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2409\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2410\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2411\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2412\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2413 2414% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2415\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2416\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2417\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2418\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2419\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2420\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2421\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2422\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2423\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2424\font\seveni=cmmi7 2425\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2426\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2427 2428% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2429\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2430\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2431\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2432\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2433\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2434\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2435\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2436\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2437\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2438\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2439\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2440\def\titleecsize{2074} 2441 2442% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2443\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2444\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2445\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2446\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2447\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2448\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2449\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2450\let\chapbf\chaprm 2451\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2452\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2453\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2454\def\chapecsize{1440} 2455 2456% Section fonts (12pt). 2457\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2458\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2459\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2460\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2461\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2462\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2463\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2464\let\secbf\secrm 2465\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2466\font\seci=cmmi12 2467\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2468\def\sececsize{1200} 2469 2470% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2471\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2472\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2473\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2474\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2475\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2476\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2477\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2478\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2479\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2480\font\sseci=cmmi10 2481\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2482\def\ssececsize{1000} 2483 2484% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2485\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2486\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2487\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2488\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2489\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2490\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2491\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2492\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2493\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2494\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2495\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2496\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2497 2498\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2499\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2500\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2501\rm 2502} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2503 2504% Fonts for short table of contents. 2505\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2506\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2507\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2508\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2509 2510 2511% We provide the user-level command 2512% @fonttextsize 10 2513% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2514% 2515\def\xiword{11} 2516\def\xword{10} 2517\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2518% 2519\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2520 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2521 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2522 % 2523 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2524 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2525 % 2526 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2527 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2528 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2529 \else 2530 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2531 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2532 \fi\fi 2533 \endgroup 2534} 2535 2536% 2537% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2538% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2539% italics, not bold italics. 2540% 2541\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2542 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2543 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2544} 2545 2546\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2547\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2548\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2549\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2550\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt} 2551 2552% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2553% So we set up a \sf. 2554\newfam\sffam 2555\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2556 2557% We don't need math for this font style. 2558\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2559 2560 2561% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2562% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2563% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2564% 2565\def\resetmathfonts{% 2566 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2567 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2568 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2569 % 2570 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2571 % of the current font size. 2572 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2573 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2574 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2575 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2576} 2577 2578% 2579 2580% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2581% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2582% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2583% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2584% 2585% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2586% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2587% 2588% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2589% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2590% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2591% 2592% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2593% 2594 2595\def\assignfonts#1{% 2596 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2597 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2598 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2599 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2600 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2601 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2602 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2603 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2604 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2605 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2606} 2607 2608\newif\ifrmisbold 2609 2610% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2611% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2612% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2613\def\switchtolllsize{% 2614 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2615 \ifrmisbold 2616 \let\rmfont\bffont 2617 \fi 2618 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2619}% 2620 2621\def\switchtolsize{% 2622 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2623 \ifrmisbold 2624 \let\rmfont\bffont 2625 \fi 2626 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2627}% 2628 2629\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2630\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2631 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2632 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2633 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2634 \assignfonts{#1}% 2635 \resetmathfonts 2636 \setleading{#4}% 2637}} 2638 2639\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2640\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2641\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2642\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2643\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2644\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2645\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2646\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2647 2648\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2649\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2650\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2651 2652% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2653\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2654\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2655 2656% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2657\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2658 2659% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2660% can fit this many characters: 2661% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2662% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2663% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2664% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2665% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2666% 2667% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2668% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2669% --karl, 24jan03. 2670 2671% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2672% 2673\definetextfontsizexi 2674 2675 2676\message{markup,} 2677 2678% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2679% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2680% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2681% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2682% 2683\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2684 2685% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2686% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2687% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2688% style. 2689 2690\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2691 2692\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2693 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2694 \markupstylesetup 2695} 2696 2697\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2698 2699\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2700 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2701 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2702 \def#1% 2703} 2704 2705% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2706\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2707 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2708 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2709 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2710} 2711 2712\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2713 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2714 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2715 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2716} 2717 2718{ 2719\catcode`\'=\active 2720\catcode`\`=\active 2721 2722\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2723\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2724 2725\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2726\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2727} 2728 2729\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2730\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2731% 2732\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2733\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2734% 2735\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2736\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2737% 2738\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2739\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2740% 2741\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2742\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2743% 2744\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2745\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2746 2747% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2748% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2749% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2750% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2751% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2752% 2753\def\codequoteright{% 2754 \ifmonospace 2755 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2756 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2757 '% 2758 \else \char'15 \fi 2759 \else \char'15 \fi 2760 \else 2761 '% 2762 \fi 2763} 2764% 2765% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2766% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2767% the code environments to do likewise. 2768% 2769\def\codequoteleft{% 2770 \ifmonospace 2771 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2772 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2773 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2774 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2775 \relax`% 2776 \else \char'22 \fi 2777 \else \char'22 \fi 2778 \else 2779 \relax`% 2780 \fi 2781} 2782 2783% Commands to set the quote options. 2784% 2785\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2786 \def\temp{#1}% 2787 \ifx\temp\onword 2788 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2789 = t% 2790 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2791 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2792 = \relax 2793 \else 2794 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2795 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2796 \fi\fi 2797} 2798% 2799\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2800 \def\temp{#1}% 2801 \ifx\temp\onword 2802 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2803 = t% 2804 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2805 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2806 = \relax 2807 \else 2808 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2809 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2810 \fi\fi 2811} 2812 2813% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2814\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2815 2816% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2817\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2818 2819% Font commands. 2820 2821% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2822% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2823% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2824\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2825 \ifusingtt 2826 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2827 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2828 \next 2829} 2830\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2831\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2832 2833% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2834% character) is such as not to need one. 2835\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2836 \ifx\next,% 2837 \else\ifx\next-% 2838 \else\ifx\next.% 2839 \else\ifx\next\.% 2840 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2841 \else\ptexslash 2842 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2843 \aftersmartic 2844} 2845 2846% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2847\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2848 2849% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2850% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2851\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2852 2853\def\aftersmartic{} 2854\def\var#1{% 2855 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2856 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2857 \smartslanted{#1}% 2858} 2859 2860\let\i=\smartitalic 2861\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2862\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2863\let\emph=\smartitalic 2864 2865% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2866\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2867\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2868\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2869 2870% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2871\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2872\let\strong=\b 2873 2874% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2875\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2876 2877% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2878% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2879% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2880% 2881\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2882\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2883 2884% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2885% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2886% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2887% 2888\catcode`@=11 2889 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2890 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2891 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2892 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2893 } 2894 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2895 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2896 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2897 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2898 } 2899\catcode`@=\other 2900\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2901 2902% @t, explicit typewriter. 2903\def\t#1{% 2904 {\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2905 \null 2906} 2907 2908% @samp. 2909\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2910 2911% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2912\let\indicateurl=\samp 2913 2914% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2915% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2916% This is a subroutine for that. 2917\def\tclose#1{% 2918 {% 2919 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2920 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2921 % 2922 % Switch to typewriter. 2923 \tt 2924 % 2925 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2926 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2927 % 2928 % Turn off hyphenation. 2929 \nohyphenation 2930 % 2931 \plainfrenchspacing 2932 #1% 2933 }% 2934 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2935} 2936 2937% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2938% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2939% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2940% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2941% 2942% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2943% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2944% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2945% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2946{ 2947 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2948 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2949 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2950 % 2951 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2952 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2953 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2954 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2955 \ifallowcodebreaks 2956 \let-\codedash 2957 \let_\codeunder 2958 \else 2959 \let-\normaldash 2960 \let_\realunder 2961 \fi 2962 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2963 % after the hyphen. 2964 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2965 % 2966 \codex 2967 } 2968 % 2969 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2970 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2971 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2972 % 2973 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2974 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2975 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2976 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2977 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2978 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2979 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2980 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2981 \fi 2982 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2983 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2984 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2985 } 2986} 2987\def\normaldash{-} 2988% 2989\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2990 2991\def\codeunder{% 2992 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2993 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2994 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2995 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2996 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2997 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2998 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2999 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 3000 {\_}% 3001} 3002 3003% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 3004% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 3005% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 3006% and _ on and off. 3007% 3008\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 3009 3010\def\keywordtrue{true} 3011\def\keywordfalse{false} 3012 3013\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 3014 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3015 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 3016 \allowcodebreakstrue 3017 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 3018 \allowcodebreaksfalse 3019 \else 3020 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3021 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 3022 \fi\fi 3023} 3024 3025% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 3026% so use \code rather than \samp. 3027\let\command=\code 3028\let\env=\code 3029\let\file=\code 3030\let\option=\code 3031 3032% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 3033% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 3034% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 3035% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 3036 3037% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 3038% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 3039\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 3040 3041% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 3042% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 3043% didn't support automatic breaking.) 3044\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 3045\let\uref=\urefbreak 3046% 3047\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 3048\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 3049 \unsepspaces 3050 \pdfurl{#1}% 3051 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 3052 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3053 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 3054 \else 3055 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3056 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3057 \ifpdf 3058 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3059 \ifurefurlonlylink 3060 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3061 \unhbox0 3062 \else 3063 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3064 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3065 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3066 \fi 3067 \else 3068 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3069 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3070 \else 3071 % For XeTeX 3072 \ifurefurlonlylink 3073 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3074 \unhbox0 3075 \else 3076 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3077 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3078 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3079 \fi 3080 \fi 3081 \fi 3082 \else 3083 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3084 \fi 3085 \fi 3086 \endlink 3087\endgroup} 3088 3089% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3090\def\urefcatcodes{% 3091 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3092 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3093 \catcode`\/=\active 3094} 3095{ 3096 \urefcatcodes 3097 % 3098 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3099 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3100 \urefcatcodes 3101 \let&\urefcodeamp 3102 \let.\urefcodedot 3103 \let#\urefcodehash 3104 \let?\urefcodequest 3105 \let/\urefcodeslash 3106 \codex 3107 } 3108 % 3109 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3110 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3111 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3112 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3113 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3114 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3115} 3116 3117\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak} 3118\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak} 3119\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak} 3120\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak} 3121\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3122{ 3123 \catcode`\/=\active 3124 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3125 \urefprebreak \slashChar 3126 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3127 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3128 \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi 3129 } 3130} 3131 3132% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to 3133% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at 3134% all, for manual control. 3135% 3136\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3137 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3138 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3139 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3140 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3141 \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3142 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3143 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak} 3144 \else 3145 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3146 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3147 \fi\fi\fi 3148} 3149\def\wordafter{after} 3150\def\wordbefore{before} 3151\def\wordnone{none} 3152 3153% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can 3154% be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in 3155% the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty100 with extra glue added 3156% at the end of the line, or no break at all here. 3157% Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how 3158% preferable one choice is over the other. 3159\def\urefallowbreak{% 3160 \allowbreak 3161 \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax 3162 \penalty300 3163 \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax 3164} 3165 3166\urefbreakstyle after 3167 3168% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3169% 3170\let\url=\uref 3171 3172% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3173% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3174% 3175%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3176\ifpdforxetex 3177 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3178 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3179 \unsepspaces 3180 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3181 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3182 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3183 \endlink 3184 \endgroup} 3185\else 3186 \let\email=\uref 3187\fi 3188 3189% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3190% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3191% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3192\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3193 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3194 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3195 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3196 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3197 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3198 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3199 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3200 \else 3201 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3202 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3203 \fi\fi\fi 3204} 3205\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3206\def\wordexample{example} 3207\def\wordcode{code} 3208 3209% Default is `distinct'. 3210\kbdinputstyle distinct 3211 3212% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3213% then @kbd has no effect. 3214\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3215 3216\def\xkey{\key} 3217\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3218 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3219 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3220 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3221 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3222} 3223 3224% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3225%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3226%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3227%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3228% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3229% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3230% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3231% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3232% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3233 3234% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3235% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3236% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3237% 3238\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3239 \nohyphenation 3240 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3241 #1}\null} 3242 3243% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3244\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3245 3246% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3247\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3248\def\click{\arrow} 3249 3250% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3251% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3252% 3253\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3254 3255% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3256% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3257% all-uppercase. 3258% 3259\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3260\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3261 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3262 \def\temp{#2}% 3263 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3264 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3265 \fi 3266 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3267} 3268 3269% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3270% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3271% 3272\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3273\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3274 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3275 \def\temp{#2}% 3276 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3277 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3278 \fi 3279 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3280} 3281 3282% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3283% 3284\def\asis#1{#1} 3285 3286% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3287% 3288% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3289% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3290% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3291% which is what @var uses. 3292{ 3293 \catcode`\_ = \active 3294 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3295 \catcode`\_=\active 3296 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3297 } 3298} 3299% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3300% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3301% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3302% 3303% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3304\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3305% 3306\def\math{% 3307 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3308 \tex 3309 \mathunderscore 3310 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3311 \mathactive 3312 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3313 \let\"=\ddot 3314 \let\'=\acute 3315 \let\==\bar 3316 \let\^=\hat 3317 \let\`=\grave 3318 \let\u=\breve 3319 \let\v=\check 3320 \let\~=\tilde 3321 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3322 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3323 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3324 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3325} 3326\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3327 3328% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3329% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3330% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3331% 3332{ 3333 \catcode`^ = \active 3334 \catcode`< = \active 3335 \catcode`> = \active 3336 \catcode`+ = \active 3337 \catcode`' = \active 3338 \gdef\mathactive{% 3339 \let^ = \ptexhat 3340 \let< = \ptexless 3341 \let> = \ptexgtr 3342 \let+ = \ptexplus 3343 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3344 } 3345} 3346 3347% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3348% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3349% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3350% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3351% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3352% 3353\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3354\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3355% 3356\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3357\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3358 3359% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3360% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3361% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3362% 3363\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3364% 3365\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3366\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3367 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3368 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3369} 3370% 3371% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3372% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3373\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3374\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3375 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3376 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3377} 3378% 3379% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3380% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3381% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3382% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3383% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3384% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3385% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3386% 3387\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3388\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3389\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3390 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3391 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3392 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3393} 3394 3395% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3396% 3397\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3398\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3399 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3400 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3401 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3402} 3403 3404% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3405% 3406\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3407\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3408 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3409 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3410} 3411 3412 3413\message{glyphs,} 3414% and logos. 3415 3416% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3417\def\@{\char64 } 3418\let\atchar=\@ 3419 3420% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3421\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3422\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3423\let\{=\lbracechar 3424\let\}=\rbracechar 3425 3426% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3427\let\comma = , 3428 3429% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3430% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3431\let\, = \ptexc 3432\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3433\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3434\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3435\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3436\let\udotaccent = \d 3437 3438% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3439% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3440\def\questiondown{?`} 3441\def\exclamdown{!`} 3442\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3443\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3444 3445% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3446\def\imacro{i} 3447\def\jmacro{j} 3448\def\dotless#1{% 3449 \def\temp{#1}% 3450 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3451 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3452 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3453 \fi\fi 3454} 3455 3456% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3457% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3458% 3459\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3460 3461% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3462% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3463% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3464% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3465% \scriptscriptstyle). 3466% 3467\def\LaTeX{% 3468 L\kern-.36em 3469 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3470 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3471 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3472 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3473 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3474 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3475 \else 3476 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3477 \switchtolllsize A% 3478 \fi 3479 }% 3480 \vss 3481 }}% 3482 \kern-.15em 3483 \TeX 3484} 3485 3486% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3487% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3488% but safer, and can't hurt. 3489\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3490\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3491% 3492\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3493\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3494\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3495\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3496 3497% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3498% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3499% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3500% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3501% whichever is larger. 3502% 3503\def\dots{% 3504 \leavevmode 3505 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3506 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3507 \dimen0 = \wd0 3508 \else 3509 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3510 \fi 3511 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3512 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3513 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3514 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3515 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3516 }% 3517} 3518 3519% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3520% 3521\def\enddots{% 3522 \dots 3523 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3524} 3525 3526% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3527% 3528% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3529% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3530% 3531\def\point{$\star$} 3532\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3533\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3534\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3535\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3536\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3537 3538% The @error{} command. 3539% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3540% 3541\newbox\errorbox 3542% 3543{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3544\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3545% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3546\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3547% 3548\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3549 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3550 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3551 \vbox{% 3552 \hrule height\dimen2 3553 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3554 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3555 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3556 \hrule height\dimen2} 3557 \hfil} 3558% 3559\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3560 3561% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3562% 3563\def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi} 3564 3565% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3566% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3567% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3568% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3569% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3570% 3571% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3572% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3573% font height. 3574% 3575% feymr - regular 3576% feymo - slanted 3577% feybr - bold 3578% feybo - bold slanted 3579% 3580% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3581% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3582% Hmm. 3583% 3584% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3585% Hope not. 3586% 3587% 3588\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3589\def\eurofont{% 3590 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3591 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3592 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3593 % font installed. 3594 % 3595 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3596 % that to the current nominal size. 3597 % 3598 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3599 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3600 % 3601 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3602 % 3603 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3604 % bold: 3605 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3606 \else 3607 % regular: 3608 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3609 \fi 3610 \thiseurofont 3611} 3612 3613% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3614% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3615% the redefinition. 3616% 3617% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3618\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3619\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3620\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3621\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3622% 3623\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3624\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3625\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3626\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3627\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3628\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3629\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3630\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3631% 3632% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3633% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3634% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3635% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3636% 3637% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3638% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3639% the same EC font. 3640\def\ogonek#1{{% 3641 \def\temp{#1}% 3642 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3643 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3644 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3645 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3646 \else 3647 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3648 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3649 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3650 \fi 3651 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3652 }% 3653} 3654\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3655\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3656\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3657\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3658% 3659% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3660% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3661% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3662% package and follow the same conventions. 3663% 3664\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3665\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3666% 3667\def\etcfont#1{% 3668 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3669 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3670 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3671 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3672 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3673 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3674 \ifmonospace 3675 % typewriter: 3676 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3677 \else 3678 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3679 % bold: 3680 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3681 \else 3682 % regular: 3683 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3684 \fi 3685 \fi 3686 \thisecfont 3687} 3688 3689% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3690% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3691% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3692% 3693\def\registeredsymbol{% 3694 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3695 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3696 }$% 3697} 3698 3699% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3700% 3701\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3702 3703% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3704% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3705% so we'll define it if necessary. 3706% 3707\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3708\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3709\fi 3710 3711% Quotes. 3712\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3713\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3714 3715% only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using 3716% \ecfont unless necessary. 3717\def\quotedblleft{% 3718 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi 3719} 3720 3721\def\quotedblright{% 3722 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi 3723} 3724 3725 3726\message{page headings,} 3727 3728\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3729\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3730 3731% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3732\newif\ifseenauthor 3733\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3734 3735% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3736% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3737\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3738 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3739 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3740 after the title page.}}% 3741\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3742 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3743 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3744 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3745 3746\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3747 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3748 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3749 3750\envdef\titlepage{% 3751 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3752 \begingroup 3753 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3754 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3755 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3756 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3757 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3758 % 3759 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3760 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3761 \let\oldpage = \page 3762 \def\page{% 3763 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3764 \finishtitlepage 3765 \fi 3766 \let\page = \oldpage 3767 \page 3768 \null 3769 }% 3770} 3771 3772\def\Etitlepage{% 3773 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3774 \finishtitlepage 3775 \fi 3776 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3777 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3778 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3779 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3780 \oldpage 3781 \endgroup 3782 % 3783 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3784 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3785 \HEADINGSon 3786} 3787 3788\def\finishtitlepage{% 3789 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3790 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3791 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3792} 3793 3794% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3795% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3796% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3797% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3798% 3799\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3800 \rm 3801 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3802 \parindent=0pt 3803 \tolerance=5000 3804 \ptexraggedright 3805} 3806 3807% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3808 3809\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3810\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3811 3812\parseargdef\title{% 3813 \checkenv\titlepage 3814 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3815 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3816 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3817 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3818} 3819 3820\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3821 \checkenv\titlepage 3822 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3823} 3824 3825% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3826% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3827% 3828\parseargdef\author{% 3829 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3830 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3831 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3832 \else 3833 \checkenv\titlepage 3834 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3835 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3836 \fi 3837} 3838 3839 3840% Set up page headings and footings. 3841 3842\let\thispage=\folio 3843 3844\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3845\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3846\newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter 3847\newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter 3848\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3849\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3850 3851% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3852\headline={{\textfonts\rm 3853 \ifchapterpage 3854 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi 3855 \else 3856 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi 3857 \fi}} 3858 3859\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3860 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3861\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3862 3863% Commands to set those variables. 3864% For example, this is what @headings on does 3865% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3866% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3867% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3868% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3869 3870 3871\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3872\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3873\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3874 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} 3875 \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline} 3876 3877\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3878\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3879\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3880 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3881 \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline} 3882 3883\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3884 3885\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3886\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3887\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3888\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3889 3890\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3891\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3892\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3893 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3894 % 3895 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3896 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3897 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3898 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3899} 3900 3901\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3902 3903% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3904% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3905% 3906% The same set of arguments for: 3907% 3908% @oddheadingmarks 3909% @evenfootingmarks 3910% @oddfootingmarks 3911% @everyheadingmarks 3912% @everyfootingmarks 3913 3914% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3915% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3916% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3917% 3918\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3919\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3920\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3921\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3922\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3923 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3924\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3925 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3926% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3927\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3928 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3929 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3930} 3931 3932\everyheadingmarks bottom 3933\everyfootingmarks bottom 3934 3935% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3936% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3937% @headings off turns them off. 3938% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3939% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3940% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3941% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3942% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3943% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3944 3945\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3946 3947\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3948 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}% 3949 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}% 3950} 3951 3952\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3953\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3954 3955% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3956\def\pageone{ 3957 \global\pageno=1 3958 \global\arabiccount = \pagecount 3959} 3960 3961% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3962% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3963% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3964% edge of all pages. 3965\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3966\pageone 3967\HEADINGSdoublex 3968} 3969\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3970 3971% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3972% page number on top right. 3973\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3974\pageone 3975\HEADINGSsinglex 3976} 3977\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3978 3979\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3980\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3981\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3982\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3983\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3984\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3985\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3986\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}} 3987\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3988\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3989} 3990 3991\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3992\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3993\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3994\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3995\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3996\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3997\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3998\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3999\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 4000} 4001 4002% for @setchapternewpage off 4003\def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{% 4004\pageone 4005\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 4006\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 4007\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 4008\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 4009\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline 4010\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline 4011\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 4012} 4013 4014% Subroutines used in generating headings 4015% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 4016% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 4017% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 4018\ifx\today\thisisundefined 4019\def\today{% 4020 \number\day\space 4021 \ifcase\month 4022 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 4023 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 4024 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 4025 \fi 4026 \space\number\year} 4027\fi 4028 4029% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 4030% It generates no output of its own. 4031\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 4032\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 4033 4034 4035\message{tables,} 4036% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 4037 4038% default indentation of table text 4039\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 4040% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 4041\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 4042% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 4043\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 4044 4045% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 4046\newdimen\itemmax 4047 4048% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 4049% these defs. 4050% They also define \itemindex 4051% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 4052 4053\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 4054 4055\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 4056 4057\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 4058\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 4059 4060\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 4061 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 4062 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 4063 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 4064 \itemindex{#1}% 4065 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 4066 % 4067 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 4068 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 4069 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 4070 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 4071 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 4072 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 4073 % 4074 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 4075 % but leave it ragged-right. 4076 \begingroup 4077 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 4078 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 4079 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 4080 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 4081 \endgroup 4082 % 4083 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4084 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4085 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4086 % 4087 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4088 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4089 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4090 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4091 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4092 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4093 % 4094 \penalty 10001 4095 \endgroup 4096 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4097 \else 4098 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4099 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4100 \noindent 4101 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4102 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4103 % eventually be printed. 4104 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4105 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4106 \unhbox0 4107 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4108 \endgroup 4109 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4110 \fi 4111} 4112 4113\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4114\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4115 4116% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4117\envdef\table{% 4118 \let\itemindex\gobble 4119 \tablecheck{table}% 4120} 4121\envdef\ftable{% 4122 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4123 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4124} 4125\envdef\vtable{% 4126 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4127 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4128} 4129\def\tablecheck#1{% 4130 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4131 \endgroup 4132 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4133 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4134 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4135 \else 4136 \let\next\tablex 4137 \fi 4138 \next 4139} 4140\def\tablex#1{% 4141 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4142 \parsearg\tabley 4143} 4144\def\tabley#1{% 4145 {% 4146 \makevalueexpandable 4147 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4148 \expandafter 4149 }\temp \endtablez 4150} 4151\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4152 \aboveenvbreak 4153 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4154 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4155 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4156 \itemmax=\tableindent 4157 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4158 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4159 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4160 \parindent = 0pt 4161 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4162 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4163 \let\item = \internalBitem 4164 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4165} 4166\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4167\let\Eftable\Etable 4168\let\Evtable\Etable 4169\let\Eitemize\Etable 4170\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4171 4172% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4173 4174\newcount \itemno 4175 4176\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4177 4178\def\doitemize#1{% 4179 \aboveenvbreak 4180 \itemmax=\itemindent 4181 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4182 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4183 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4184 \parindent=0pt 4185 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4186 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4187 % 4188 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4189 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4190 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4191 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4192 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4193 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4194 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4195 % 4196 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4197 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4198 % 4199 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4200} 4201 4202% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4203% 4204\def\itemizeitem{% 4205 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4206 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4207 {% 4208 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4209 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4210 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4211 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4212 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4213 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4214 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4215 % that's the theory. 4216 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4217 \noindent 4218 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4219 % 4220 \ifinner\else 4221 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4222 \fi 4223 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4224 % @itemize looks awful there. 4225 }% 4226 \flushcr 4227} 4228 4229% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4230% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4231% 4232\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4233 4234% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4235% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4236% argument is the same as `1'. 4237% 4238\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4239\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4240 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4241 \def\thearg{#1}% 4242 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4243 % 4244 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4245 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4246 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4247 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4248 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4249 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4250 \ifx\rest\empty 4251 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4252 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4253 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4254 % not equal to itself. 4255 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4256 % 4257 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4258 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4259 % 4260 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4261 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4262 \else 4263 % It's a letter. 4264 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4265 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4266 \else 4267 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4268 \fi 4269 \fi 4270 \else 4271 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4272 \numericenumerate 4273 \fi 4274} 4275 4276% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4277% given in \thearg. 4278% 4279\def\numericenumerate{% 4280 \itemno = \thearg 4281 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4282} 4283 4284% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4285\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4286 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4287 \startenumeration{% 4288 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4289 \ifnum\itemno=0 4290 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4291 alphabet}% 4292 \fi 4293 \char\lccode\itemno 4294 }% 4295} 4296 4297% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4298\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4299 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4300 \startenumeration{% 4301 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4302 \ifnum\itemno=0 4303 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4304 alphabet} 4305 \fi 4306 \char\uccode\itemno 4307 }% 4308} 4309 4310% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4311% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4312% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4313% 4314\def\startenumeration#1{% 4315 \advance\itemno by -1 4316 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4317} 4318 4319% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4320% to @enumerate. 4321% 4322\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4323\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4324\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4325\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4326 4327 4328% @multitable macros 4329% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4330% 4331% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4332% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4333% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4334% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4335 4336% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4337 4338% To make preamble: 4339% 4340% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4341% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4342% @item ... 4343% 4344% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4345% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4346% columns as desired. 4347 4348 4349% Or use a template: 4350% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4351% @item ... 4352% using the widest term desired in each column. 4353 4354% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4355% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4356% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4357% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4358 4359% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4360% if they are. 4361 4362% Sample multitable: 4363 4364% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4365% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4366% @item 4367% first col stuff 4368% @tab 4369% second col stuff 4370% @tab 4371% third col 4372% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4373% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4374% 4375% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4376% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4377% @end multitable 4378 4379% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4380% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4381% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4382% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4383% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4384% to baseline. 4385% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4386% 4387\newskip\multitableparskip 4388\newskip\multitableparindent 4389\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4390\newskip\multitablelinespace 4391\multitableparskip=0pt 4392\multitableparindent=6pt 4393\multitablecolspace=12pt 4394\multitablelinespace=0pt 4395 4396% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4397% 4398\let\endsetuptable\relax 4399\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4400\let\columnfractions\relax 4401\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4402\newif\ifsetpercent 4403 4404% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4405% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4406% 4407\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4408 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4409 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4410 \setuptable 4411} 4412 4413\newcount\colcount 4414\def\setuptable#1{% 4415 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4416 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4417 \let\go = \relax 4418 \else 4419 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4420 \global\setpercenttrue 4421 \else 4422 \ifsetpercent 4423 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4424 \else 4425 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4426 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4427 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4428 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4429 \fi 4430 \fi 4431 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4432 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4433 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4434 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4435 \else 4436 \let\go = \setuptable 4437 \fi% 4438 \fi 4439 \go 4440} 4441 4442% multitable-only commands. 4443% 4444% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4445% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4446% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4447% undo it ourselves. 4448\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4449\def\headitem{% 4450 \checkenv\multitable 4451 \crcr 4452 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4453 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4454 \the\everytab % for the first item 4455}% 4456% 4457% default for tables with no headings. 4458\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4459% 4460% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4461% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4462% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4463% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4464\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4465 4466% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4467% 4468\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4469% 4470\envdef\multitable{% 4471 \vskip\parskip 4472 \startsavinginserts 4473 % 4474 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4475 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4476 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4477 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4478 \def\item{\crcr}% 4479 % 4480 \tolerance=9500 4481 \hbadness=9500 4482 \setmultitablespacing 4483 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4484 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4485 \overfullrule=0pt 4486 \global\colcount=0 4487 % 4488 \everycr = {% 4489 \noalign{% 4490 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4491 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4492 % 4493 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4494 \checkinserts 4495 % 4496 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4497 \headitemcrhook 4498 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4499 }% 4500 }% 4501 % 4502 \parsearg\domultitable 4503} 4504\def\domultitable#1{% 4505 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4506 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4507 % 4508 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4509 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4510 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4511 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4512 \halign\bgroup &% 4513 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4514 \multistrut 4515 \vtop{% 4516 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4517 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4518 % 4519 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4520 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4521 % the first one. 4522 % 4523 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4524 % to the width of each template entry. 4525 % 4526 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4527 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4528 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4529 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4530 % 4531 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4532 \rightskip=0pt 4533 \ifnum\colcount=1 4534 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4535 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4536 \else 4537 \ifsetpercent \else 4538 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4539 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4540 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4541 \fi 4542 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4543 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4544 \fi 4545 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4546 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4547 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4548 % For example: 4549 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4550 % @item @code{#} 4551 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4552 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4553 % marking characters. 4554 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4555 }\cr 4556} 4557\def\Emultitable{% 4558 \crcr 4559 \egroup % end the \halign 4560 \global\setpercentfalse 4561} 4562 4563\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4564 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4565 % 4566 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4567 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4568 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4569 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4570\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4571\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4572\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4573\fi 4574% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4575% table. If not, do nothing. 4576% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4577\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4578\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4579\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4580 % than skip between lines in the table. 4581\fi% 4582\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4583\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4584\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4585 % than skip between lines in the table. 4586\fi} 4587 4588 4589\message{conditionals,} 4590 4591% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4592% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4593% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4594% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4595% attempt to close an environment group. 4596% 4597\def\makecond#1{% 4598 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4599 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4600} 4601\makecond{iftex} 4602\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4603\makecond{ifnothtml} 4604\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4605\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4606\makecond{ifnotxml} 4607 4608% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4609% 4610\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4611\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4612\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4613\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4614\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4615\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4616\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4617\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4618\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4619\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4620\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4621\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4622\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4623 4624% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4625% 4626% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4627\newcount\doignorecount 4628 4629\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4630 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4631 \obeylines 4632 \catcode`\@ = \other 4633 \catcode`\{ = \other 4634 \catcode`\} = \other 4635 % 4636 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4637 \spaceisspace 4638 % 4639 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4640 \doignorecount = 0 4641 % 4642 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4643 \dodoignore{#1}% 4644} 4645 4646{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4647 \obeylines % 4648 % 4649 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4650 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4651 % 4652 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4653 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4654 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4655 % 4656 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4657 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4658 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4659 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4660 % 4661 % And now expand that command. 4662 \doignoretext ^^M% 4663 }% 4664} 4665 4666\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4667 \def\temp{#1}% 4668 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4669 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4670 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4671 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4672 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4673 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4674 \fi 4675 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4676} 4677 4678% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4679% 4680\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4681 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4682 \let\next\enddoignore 4683 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4684 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4685 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4686 \fi 4687 \next 4688} 4689 4690% Finish off ignored text. 4691{ \obeylines% 4692 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4693 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4694 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4695 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4696} 4697 4698 4699% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4700% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4701% 4702% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4703% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4704% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4705% didn't need it. 4706% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4707% 4708\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4709\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4710 {% 4711 \makevalueexpandable 4712 \def\temp{#2}% 4713 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4714 \ifx\temp\empty 4715 \next{}% 4716 \else 4717 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4718 \fi 4719 }% 4720} 4721% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4722\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4723 4724% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4725% 4726\parseargdef\clear{% 4727 {% 4728 \makevalueexpandable 4729 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4730 }% 4731} 4732 4733% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4734\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4735\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4736{ 4737 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4738 % 4739 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4740 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4741 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4742 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4743 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4744 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4745 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4746 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4747 } 4748} 4749 4750\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4751 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4752 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4753 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4754 \else 4755 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4756 \fi 4757} 4758 4759% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4760% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4761% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4762% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4763% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4764% 4765% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4766\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4767 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4768 \string\value{#1}% 4769 \else 4770 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4771 \fi 4772} 4773 4774% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4775% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4776\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4777 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4778 ZZZZZZZ% 4779 \else 4780 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4781 \fi 4782} 4783 4784% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4785% with @set. 4786% 4787% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4788% \makecond and then redefine. 4789% 4790\makecond{ifset} 4791\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4792\def\doifset#1#2{% 4793 {% 4794 \makevalueexpandable 4795 \let\next=\empty 4796 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4797 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4798 \fi 4799 \expandafter 4800 }\next 4801} 4802\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4803 4804% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4805% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4806% 4807% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4808% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4809% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4810% 4811\makecond{ifclear} 4812\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4813\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4814 4815% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4816% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4817% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4818% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4819% 4820\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4821\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4822% 4823\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4824 \makevalueexpandable 4825 \let\next=\empty 4826 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4827 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4828 \fi 4829 \expandafter 4830 }\next 4831} 4832\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4833 4834% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4835\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4836\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4837 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4838\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4839 4840% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4841% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4842\set txicommandconditionals 4843 4844% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4845% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4846\let\dircategory=\comment 4847 4848% @defininfoenclose. 4849\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4850 4851 4852\message{indexing,} 4853% Index generation facilities 4854 4855% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4856% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4857\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4858 4859% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4860% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4861% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4862% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4863% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4864% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4865% for the sake of vms. 4866% 4867\def\newindex#1{% 4868 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4869 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4870 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4871} 4872 4873% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4874% 4875\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4876 4877% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4878% 4879\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4880% 4881\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4882 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4883 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4884 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4885} 4886 4887% The default indices: 4888\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4889\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4890\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4891\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4892\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4893\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4894 4895 4896% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4897% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4898% 4899% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4900% inside @code. 4901% 4902\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4903\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4904 4905% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4906% #3 the target index (bar). 4907\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4908 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4909 % redefine \fooindfile: 4910 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4911 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4912 % redefine \fooindex: 4913 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4914} 4915 4916% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4917% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4918% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4919 4920\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4921\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4922 4923% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4924\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4925\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4926 4927 4928% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo 4929% commands. 4930% 4931\def\atdummies{% 4932 \definedummyletter\@% 4933 \definedummyletter\ % 4934 \definedummyletter\{% 4935 \definedummyletter\}% 4936 \definedummyletter\&% 4937 % 4938 % Do the redefinitions. 4939 \definedummies 4940 \otherbackslash 4941} 4942 4943% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4944% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4945% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4946% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4947% from whatever follows. 4948% 4949% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4950% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4951% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4952% 4953% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4954% space. 4955% 4956\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4957\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4958\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4959 4960% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands. 4961% 4962\def\definedummies{% 4963 % 4964 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4965 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4966 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4967 \commondummiesnofonts 4968 % 4969 \definedummyletter\_% 4970 \definedummyletter\-% 4971 % 4972 % Non-English letters. 4973 \definedummyword\AA 4974 \definedummyword\AE 4975 \definedummyword\DH 4976 \definedummyword\L 4977 \definedummyword\O 4978 \definedummyword\OE 4979 \definedummyword\TH 4980 \definedummyword\aa 4981 \definedummyword\ae 4982 \definedummyword\dh 4983 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4984 \definedummyword\l 4985 \definedummyword\o 4986 \definedummyword\oe 4987 \definedummyword\ordf 4988 \definedummyword\ordm 4989 \definedummyword\questiondown 4990 \definedummyword\ss 4991 \definedummyword\th 4992 % 4993 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4994 \definedummyword\bf 4995 \definedummyword\gtr 4996 \definedummyword\hat 4997 \definedummyword\less 4998 \definedummyword\sf 4999 \definedummyword\sl 5000 \definedummyword\tclose 5001 \definedummyword\tt 5002 % 5003 \definedummyword\LaTeX 5004 \definedummyword\TeX 5005 % 5006 % Assorted special characters. 5007 \definedummyword\ampchar 5008 \definedummyword\atchar 5009 \definedummyword\arrow 5010 \definedummyword\backslashchar 5011 \definedummyword\bullet 5012 \definedummyword\comma 5013 \definedummyword\copyright 5014 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 5015 \definedummyword\dots 5016 \definedummyword\enddots 5017 \definedummyword\entrybreak 5018 \definedummyword\equiv 5019 \definedummyword\error 5020 \definedummyword\euro 5021 \definedummyword\expansion 5022 \definedummyword\geq 5023 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 5024 \definedummyword\guillemetright 5025 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 5026 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 5027 \definedummyword\lbracechar 5028 \definedummyword\leq 5029 \definedummyword\mathopsup 5030 \definedummyword\minus 5031 \definedummyword\ogonek 5032 \definedummyword\pounds 5033 \definedummyword\point 5034 \definedummyword\print 5035 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 5036 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 5037 \definedummyword\quotedblright 5038 \definedummyword\quoteleft 5039 \definedummyword\quoteright 5040 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 5041 \definedummyword\rbracechar 5042 \definedummyword\result 5043 \definedummyword\sub 5044 \definedummyword\sup 5045 \definedummyword\textdegree 5046 % 5047 \definedummyword\subentry 5048 % 5049 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 5050 \macrolist 5051 \let\value\dummyvalue 5052 % 5053 \normalturnoffactive 5054} 5055 5056% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 5057% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 5058% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 5059% 5060\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 5061 % Control letters and accents. 5062 \commondummyletter\!% 5063 \commondummyaccent\"% 5064 \commondummyaccent\'% 5065 \commondummyletter\*% 5066 \commondummyaccent\,% 5067 \commondummyletter\.% 5068 \commondummyletter\/% 5069 \commondummyletter\:% 5070 \commondummyaccent\=% 5071 \commondummyletter\?% 5072 \commondummyaccent\^% 5073 \commondummyaccent\`% 5074 \commondummyaccent\~% 5075 \commondummyword\u 5076 \commondummyword\v 5077 \commondummyword\H 5078 \commondummyword\dotaccent 5079 \commondummyword\ogonek 5080 \commondummyword\ringaccent 5081 \commondummyword\tieaccent 5082 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 5083 \commondummyword\udotaccent 5084 \commondummyword\dotless 5085 % 5086 % Texinfo font commands. 5087 \commondummyword\b 5088 \commondummyword\i 5089 \commondummyword\r 5090 \commondummyword\sansserif 5091 \commondummyword\sc 5092 \commondummyword\slanted 5093 \commondummyword\t 5094 % 5095 % Commands that take arguments. 5096 \commondummyword\abbr 5097 \commondummyword\acronym 5098 \commondummyword\anchor 5099 \commondummyword\cite 5100 \commondummyword\code 5101 \commondummyword\command 5102 \commondummyword\dfn 5103 \commondummyword\dmn 5104 \commondummyword\email 5105 \commondummyword\emph 5106 \commondummyword\env 5107 \commondummyword\file 5108 \commondummyword\image 5109 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5110 \commondummyword\inforef 5111 \commondummyword\kbd 5112 \commondummyword\key 5113 \commondummyword\math 5114 \commondummyword\option 5115 \commondummyword\pxref 5116 \commondummyword\ref 5117 \commondummyword\samp 5118 \commondummyword\strong 5119 \commondummyword\tie 5120 \commondummyword\U 5121 \commondummyword\uref 5122 \commondummyword\url 5123 \commondummyword\var 5124 \commondummyword\verb 5125 \commondummyword\w 5126 \commondummyword\xref 5127} 5128 5129\let\indexlbrace\relax 5130\let\indexrbrace\relax 5131\let\indexatchar\relax 5132\let\indexbackslash\relax 5133 5134{\catcode`\@=0 5135\catcode`\\=13 5136 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5137} 5138 5139{ 5140\catcode`\<=13 5141\catcode`\-=13 5142\catcode`\`=13 5143 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5144 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5145 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5146 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5147 \let`=\empty 5148 \fi 5149 % 5150 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5151 \backslashdisappear 5152 \fi 5153 % 5154 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5155 \def-{}% 5156 \fi 5157 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5158 \def<{}% 5159 \fi 5160 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5161 \def\@{}% 5162 \fi 5163 } 5164 5165 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5166 \let-\normaldash 5167 \let<\normalless 5168 } 5169} 5170 5171 5172% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5173% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5174% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5175% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5176% 5177\def\indexnofonts{% 5178 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5179 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5180 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5181 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5182 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5183 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5184 \commondummiesnofonts 5185 % 5186 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5187 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5188 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5189 %\let\tt=\asis 5190 % 5191 \def\ { }% 5192 \def\@{@}% 5193 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5194 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5195 % 5196 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5197 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5198 \let\lbracechar\{% 5199 \let\rbracechar\}% 5200 % 5201 % 5202 \let\do\indexnofontsdef 5203 % 5204 % Non-English letters. 5205 \do\AA{AA}% 5206 \do\AE{AE}% 5207 \do\DH{DZZ}% 5208 \do\L{L}% 5209 \do\OE{OE}% 5210 \do\O{O}% 5211 \do\TH{TH}% 5212 \do\aa{aa}% 5213 \do\ae{ae}% 5214 \do\dh{dzz}% 5215 \do\exclamdown{!}% 5216 \do\l{l}% 5217 \do\oe{oe}% 5218 \do\ordf{a}% 5219 \do\ordm{o}% 5220 \do\o{o}% 5221 \do\questiondown{?}% 5222 \do\ss{ss}% 5223 \do\th{th}% 5224 % 5225 \do\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5226 \do\TeX{TeX}% 5227 % 5228 % Assorted special characters. 5229 \do\atchar{@}% 5230 \do\arrow{->}% 5231 \do\bullet{bullet}% 5232 \do\comma{,}% 5233 \do\copyright{copyright}% 5234 \do\dots{...}% 5235 \do\enddots{...}% 5236 \do\equiv{==}% 5237 \do\error{error}% 5238 \do\euro{euro}% 5239 \do\expansion{==>}% 5240 \do\geq{>=}% 5241 \do\guillemetleft{<<}% 5242 \do\guillemetright{>>}% 5243 \do\guilsinglleft{<}% 5244 \do\guilsinglright{>}% 5245 \do\leq{<=}% 5246 \do\lbracechar{\{}% 5247 \do\minus{-}% 5248 \do\point{.}% 5249 \do\pounds{pounds}% 5250 \do\print{-|}% 5251 \do\quotedblbase{"}% 5252 \do\quotedblleft{"}% 5253 \do\quotedblright{"}% 5254 \do\quoteleft{`}% 5255 \do\quoteright{'}% 5256 \do\quotesinglbase{,}% 5257 \do\rbracechar{\}}% 5258 \do\registeredsymbol{R}% 5259 \do\result{=>}% 5260 \do\textdegree{o}% 5261 % 5262 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5263 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5264 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5265 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5266 % that starts with \. 5267 % 5268 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5269 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5270 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5271 % 5272 \macrolist 5273 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5274} 5275 5276% Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows 5277% its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA 5278\def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}% 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5284\def\doind#1#2{% 5285 \iflinks 5286 {% 5287 % 5288 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5289 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5290 % 5291 \def\indextext{#2}% 5292 \safewhatsit\doindwrite 5293 }% 5294 \fi 5295} 5296 5297% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5298\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5299\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5300 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5301 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5302 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5303 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5304 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5305 % Open the file 5306 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5307 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5308 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5309 % preceding skips. 5310 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5311\fi} 5312\def\indexisfl{fl} 5313 5314% Definition for writing index entry sort key. 5315{ 5316\catcode`\-=13 5317\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5318 \begingroup 5319 \indexnonalnumreappear 5320 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5321\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5322 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5323} 5324 5325\def\indexwriteseealso#1{ 5326 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}% 5327} 5328\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{ 5329 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}% 5330} 5331 5332% The default definitions 5333\def\sortas#1{}% 5334\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5335\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also} 5336\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5337 5338 5339% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}": 5340% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}" 5341% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ" 5342% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext 5343% 5344\def\splitindexentry#1{% 5345 \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}% 5346 \xdef\bracedtext{}% 5347 \def\sep{}% 5348 \def\seealso##1{}% 5349 \def\seeentry##1{}% 5350 \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry 5351} 5352 5353% append the results from the next segment 5354\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{% 5355 \def\segment{#1}% 5356 \ifx\segment\isfinish 5357 \else 5358 % 5359 % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and 5360 % trim spaces. 5361 \edef\trimmed{\segment}% 5362 \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5363 % 5364 \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}% 5365 % 5366 % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all 5367 % font commands turned off. 5368 \bgroup 5369 \let\sortas\indexwritesortas 5370 \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso 5371 \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry 5372 \indexnofonts 5373 % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex. 5374 \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}% 5375 \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}% 5376 \let\{=\lbracechar 5377 \let\}=\rbracechar 5378 \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}% 5379 \def\atchar##1{\@}% 5380 \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}% 5381 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}% 5382 % 5383 \let\indexsortkey\empty 5384 \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty 5385 % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes 5386 % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment. 5387 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}% 5388 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{% 5389 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5390 \xdef\trimmed{\segment}% 5391 \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5392 \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}% 5393 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5394 }\fi 5395 % 5396 % Append to \fullindexsortkey. 5397 \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{% 5398 \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}% 5399 \tmp 5400 \egroup 5401 \def\sep{\subentry}% 5402 % 5403 \expandafter\doindexsegment 5404 \fi 5405} 5406\def\isfinish{\finish}% 5407\newbox\dummybox % used above 5408 5409\let\subentry\relax 5410 5411% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex. 5412% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux 5413% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses 5414% the current value of \escapechar. 5415\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\} 5416 5417% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape 5418% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When 5419% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then 5420% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy 5421% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in 5422% index files, never standing for themselves. 5423% 5424\set txiindexescapeisbackslash 5425 5426% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file. 5427% 5428\def\doindwrite{% 5429 \maybemarginindex 5430 % 5431 \atdummies 5432 % 5433 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else 5434 \escapeisbackslash 5435 \fi 5436 % 5437 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 5438 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 5439 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 5440 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}% 5441 % 5442 % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index 5443 % sort key. 5444 \splitindexentry\indextext 5445 % 5446 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5447 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5448 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5449 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5450 % sorted result. 5451 % 5452 \edef\temp{% 5453 \write\writeto{% 5454 \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}% 5455 {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}% 5456 \bracedtext}% 5457 }% 5458 \temp 5459} 5460 5461% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented). 5462\def\maybemarginindex{% 5463 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5464 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}% 5465 \fi 5466} 5467\let\SETmarginindex=\relax 5468 5469 5470% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5471% 5472% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5473% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5474% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5475% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5476% sequences like this: 5477% @end defun 5478% @tindex whatever 5479% @defun ... 5480% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5481% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5482% the previous defun. 5483% 5484% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5485% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5486% 5487% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5488% 5489% But wait, there is a catch there: 5490% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5491% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5492% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5493% representation of the skip. 5494% 5495% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5496% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5497% 5498\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5499% 5500\newskip\whatsitskip 5501\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5502% 5503% ..., ready, GO: 5504% 5505\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5506 #1% 5507 \else 5508 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5509 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5510 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5511 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5512 % 5513 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5514 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5515 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5516 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5517 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5518 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5519 \else 5520 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5521 \fi 5522 % 5523 #1% 5524 % 5525 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5526 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5527 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5528 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5529 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5530 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5531 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5532 % @vindex index-whatever 5533 % Description. 5534 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5535 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5536 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5537 \else 5538 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5539 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5540 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5541 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5542 \fi 5543\fi} 5544 5545% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5546% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5547% or 5548% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5549% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5550% containing these kinds of lines: 5551% \initial {c} 5552% before the first topic whose initial is c 5553% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5554% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5555% \primary {topic} 5556% \entry {topic}{} 5557% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5558% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5559% for each subtopic. 5560% \secondary {subtopic}{} 5561% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics 5562% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist} 5563% for each sub-subtopic. 5564 5565% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5566% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5567 5568\def\findex {\fnindex} 5569\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5570\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5571\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5572\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5573\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5574 5575% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5576 5577% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5578% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5579% 5580\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5581 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5582 % 5583 \smallfonts \rm 5584 \tolerance = 9500 5585 \plainfrenchspacing 5586 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5587 % 5588 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5589 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5590 % 5591 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5592 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5593 \ifeof 1 5594 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5595 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5596 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5597 % there is some text. 5598 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5599 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5600 \else 5601 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5602 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5603 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5604 \read 1 to \thisline 5605 \ifeof 1 5606 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5607 \else 5608 \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish% 5609 \fi 5610 \fi 5611 \closein 1 5612\endgroup} 5613 5614% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index 5615% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have 5616% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would 5617% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error. 5618\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{% 5619 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax 5620 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1 5621 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax 5622\errmessage{% 5623ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped. 5624To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi' 5625or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>. 5626If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo 5627distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0). 5628You may be able to typeset the index if you run 5629'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself. 5630You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by 5631running a command like 5632'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do 5633this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format. 5634If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again 5635might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')% 5636}% 5637 \else 5638 (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format) 5639 \fi 5640 \else 5641 \begindoublecolumns 5642 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5643 \enddoublecolumns 5644 \fi 5645 \else 5646 \begindoublecolumns 5647 \catcode`\\=0\relax 5648 \catcode`\@=12\relax 5649 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5650 \enddoublecolumns 5651 \fi 5652} 5653 5654% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5655% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5656 5657{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5658\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5659\catcode`\$=3 5660\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5661 % special control sequences used in the index sort key 5662 \let\indexlbrace\{% 5663 \let\indexrbrace\}% 5664 \let\indexatchar\@% 5665 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5666 % 5667 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5668 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5669 % for these characters. 5670 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}} 5671 % 5672 % In case @\ is used for backslash 5673 \uppercase{\let\\=~} 5674 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5675 \catcode`\/=13 5676 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5677 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5678 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5679 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5680 \def\_{% 5681 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5682 \def|{$\vert$}% 5683 \def<{$\less$}% 5684 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5685 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5686}} 5687 5688\def\initial{% 5689 \bgroup 5690 \initialglyphs 5691 \initialx 5692} 5693 5694\def\initialx#1{% 5695 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5696 \removelastskip 5697 % 5698 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5699 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5700 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5701 \nobreak 5702 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5703 \penalty -300 5704 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5705 % 5706 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5707 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5708 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5709 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5710 % 5711 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5712 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5713 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5714 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5715 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5716 % \leftline creates. 5717 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5718 \nobreak 5719 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5720 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5721} 5722 5723\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5724\entryrightmargin=0pt 5725 5726% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5727% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5728% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5729% 5730\def\entry{% 5731 \begingroup 5732 % 5733 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5734 % affect previous text. 5735 \par 5736 % 5737 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5738 \parskip = 0in 5739 % 5740 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5741 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5742 % titles, for instance. 5743 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5744 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5745 % 5746 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5747 \afterassignment\doentry 5748 \let\temp = 5749} 5750\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5751\def\doentry{% 5752 % Save the text of the entry 5753 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5754 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5755 \noindent 5756 \aftergroup\finishentry 5757 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5758 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5759 % with catcodes occurring. 5760} 5761{\catcode`\@=11 5762\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5763 \egroup % end box A 5764 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5765 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5766 \unhbox\boxA 5767 % #1 is the page number. 5768 % 5769 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5770 % leaders if they are present. 5771 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5772 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5773 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5774 \else 5775 % 5776 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5777 % 5778 \ifpdforxetex 5779 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5780 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5781 \else 5782 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5783 \fi 5784 \fi 5785 \egroup % end \boxA 5786 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5787 \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par 5788 \nobreak 5789 \else\bgroup 5790 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5791 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5792 % 5793 \parindent = 0pt 5794 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5795 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5796 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5797 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5798 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5799 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5800 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5801 % 5802 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5803 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5804 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5805 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5806 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5807 \dimen@i=2.1em 5808 \else 5809 \dimen@i=0em 5810 \fi 5811 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5812 % 5813 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5814 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5815 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5816 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5817 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5818 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5819 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5820 % the first line. 5821 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5822 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5823 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5824 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5825 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5826 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5827 \fi 5828 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5829 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5830 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5831 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5832 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5833 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5834 % 5835 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5836 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5837 \advance\parindent by -1em 5838 \fi\fi 5839 \indent % start paragraph 5840 \unhbox\boxA 5841 % 5842 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5843 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5844 % 5845 % Word spacing - no stretch 5846 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5847 % 5848 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5849 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5850 % 5851 \par % format the paragraph 5852 \egroup % The \vbox 5853 \fi 5854 \endgroup 5855}} 5856 5857\newskip\thinshrinkable 5858\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5859 5860% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5861% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5862% the page number to the right. 5863\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5864 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5865 5866 5867\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5868 5869\def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}} 5870\def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}} 5871 5872\def\indententry#1#2#3{% 5873 \bgroup 5874 \leftskip=#1 5875 \entry{#2}{#3}% 5876 \egroup 5877} 5878 5879% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5880% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5881% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5882\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5883 5884\newbox\partialpage 5885\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5886 5887\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5888 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5889 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5890 % 5891 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5892 \output = {% 5893 \savetopmark 5894 % 5895 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5896 % Unvbox the main output page. 5897 \unvbox\PAGE 5898 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5899 }% 5900 }% 5901 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5902 % 5903 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5904 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5905 % 5906 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5907 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5908 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5909 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5910 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5911 % 5912 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5913 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5914 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5915 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5916 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5917 % 5918 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5919 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5920 % been clobbered. 5921 % 5922 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5923 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5924 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5925 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5926 % 5927 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5928 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5929 % previous page. 5930 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5931 \vsize = 2\vsize 5932 % 5933 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5934 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5935} 5936 5937% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5938% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5939% 5940\def\doublecolumnout{% 5941 % 5942 \savetopmark 5943 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5944 \dimen@ = \vsize 5945 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5946 % 5947 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5948 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5949 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5950 \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called 5951 \unvbox\PAGE 5952 \penalty\outputpenalty 5953} 5954% 5955% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5956% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5957\def\pagesofar{% 5958 \unvbox\partialpage 5959 % 5960 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5961 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5962 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5963} 5964 5965 5966% Finished with double columns. 5967\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5968 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5969 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5970 % following situation: 5971 % 5972 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5973 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5974 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5975 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5976 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5977 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5978 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5979 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5980 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5981 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5982 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5983 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5984 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5985 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5986 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5987 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5988 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5989 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5990 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5991 % 5992 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5993 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5994 \penalty0 5995 % 5996 \output = {% 5997 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5998 \savetopmark 5999 \balancecolumns 6000 }% 6001 \eject % call the \output just set 6002 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 6003 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 6004 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 6005 % definition right away. 6006 \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 6007 % 6008 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 6009 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 6010 % page break. 6011 \box\balancedcolumns 6012 % 6013 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 6014 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 6015 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 6016 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 6017 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 6018 \else 6019 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 6020 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 6021 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 6022 \fi 6023} 6024\newbox\balancedcolumns 6025\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 6026% 6027% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 6028% does the others. 6029\def\balancecolumns{% 6030 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 6031 \dimen@ = \ht0 6032 \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip 6033 % Don't split a short final column in two. 6034 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 6035 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6036 \else 6037 % double the leading vertical space 6038 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 6039 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 6040 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 6041 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 6042 \splittopskip = \topskip 6043 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 6044 {% 6045 \vbadness = 10000 6046 \loop 6047 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 6048 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 6049 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 6050 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 6051 \repeat 6052 }% 6053 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 6054 % 6055 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 6056 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 6057 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 6058 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 6059 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 6060 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 6061 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 6062 \doublecolumnout 6063 \else 6064 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 6065 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 6066 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 6067 % flush with each other. 6068 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 6069 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 6070 \else 6071 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 6072 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 6073 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 6074 \fi 6075 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6076 \fi 6077 \fi 6078 % 6079} 6080\catcode`\@ = \other 6081 6082 6083\message{sectioning,} 6084% Chapters, sections, etc. 6085 6086% Let's start with @part. 6087\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 6088\def\partzzz#1{% 6089 \chapoddpage 6090 \null 6091 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 6092 \begingroup 6093 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 6094 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 6095 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 6096 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6097 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6098 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6099 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6100 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6101 \chapoddpage 6102 \endgroup 6103} 6104 6105% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6106% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6107% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6108% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6109% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6110\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6111\newcount\chapno 6112\newcount\secno \secno=0 6113\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6114\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6115 6116% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6117\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6118% 6119% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6120% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6121% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6122% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6123% 6124\def\appendixletter{% 6125 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6126 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6127 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6128 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6129 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6130 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6131 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6132 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6133 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6134 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6135 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6136 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6137 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6138 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6139 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6140 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6141 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6142 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6143 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6144 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6145 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6146 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6147 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6148 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6149 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6150 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6151 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6152 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6153 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6154 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6155 \else\char\the\appendixno 6156 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6157 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6158 6159% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6160% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6161% these. @section does likewise. 6162\def\thischapter{} 6163\def\thischapternum{} 6164\def\thischaptername{} 6165\def\thissection{} 6166\def\thissectionnum{} 6167\def\thissectionname{} 6168 6169\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6170\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6171 6172% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6173\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6174 6175% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6176\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6177 6178% we only have subsub. 6179\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6180% 6181% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6182% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6183\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6184% 6185% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6186% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6187\def\chapheadtype{N} 6188 6189% Choose a heading macro 6190% #1 is heading type 6191% #2 is heading level 6192% #3 is text for heading 6193\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6194 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6195 \absseclevel=#2 6196 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6197 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6198 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6199 \absseclevel = 0 6200 \else 6201 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6202 \absseclevel = 3 6203 \fi 6204 \fi 6205 % The heading type: 6206 \def\headtype{#1}% 6207 \if \headtype U% 6208 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6209 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6210 \fi 6211 \else 6212 % Check for appendix sections: 6213 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6214 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6215 \else 6216 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6217 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6218 \fi\fi 6219 \fi 6220 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6221 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6222 \def\headtype{U}% 6223 \else 6224 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6225 \fi 6226 \fi 6227 % Now print the heading: 6228 \if \headtype U% 6229 \ifcase\absseclevel 6230 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6231 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6232 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6233 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6234 \fi 6235 \else 6236 \if \headtype A% 6237 \ifcase\absseclevel 6238 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6239 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6240 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6241 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6242 \fi 6243 \else 6244 \ifcase\absseclevel 6245 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6246 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6247 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6248 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6249 \fi 6250 \fi 6251 \fi 6252 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6253} 6254 6255% an interface: 6256\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6257\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6258\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6259 6260% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6261% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6262% 6263% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6264% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6265\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6266% 6267\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6268\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6269 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6270 % as an @include file. 6271 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6272 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6273 % 6274 % Used for \float. 6275 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6276 \resetallfloatnos 6277 % 6278 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6279 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6280 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6281 % 6282 % Write the actual heading. 6283 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6284 % 6285 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6286 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6287 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6288 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6289} 6290 6291\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6292% 6293\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6294 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6295 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6296 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6297 \resetallfloatnos 6298 % 6299 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6300 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6301 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6302 % 6303 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6304 % 6305 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6306 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6307 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6308} 6309 6310% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6311\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6312\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6313 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6314 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6315 % 6316 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6317 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6318 \resetallfloatnos 6319 % 6320 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6321 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6322 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6323 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6324 % to be executed, not expanded). 6325 % 6326 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6327 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6328 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6329 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6330 % the toc entries.) 6331 \toks0 = {#1}% 6332 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6333 % 6334 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6335 % 6336 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6337 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6338 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6339} 6340 6341% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6342\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6343 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6344 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6345 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6346} 6347 6348% @top is like @unnumbered. 6349\let\top\unnumbered 6350 6351% Sections. 6352% 6353\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6354\def\seczzz#1{% 6355 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6356 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6357} 6358 6359% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6360\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6361\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6362 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6363 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6364} 6365\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6366 6367% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6368\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6369\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6370 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6371 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6372} 6373 6374% Subsections. 6375% 6376% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6377\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6378\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6379 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6380 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6381} 6382 6383% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6384\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6385\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6386 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6387 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6388 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6389} 6390 6391% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6392\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6393\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6394 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6395 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6396 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6397} 6398 6399% Subsubsections. 6400% 6401% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6402\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6403\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6404 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6405 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6406 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6407} 6408 6409% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6410\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6411\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6412 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6413 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6414 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6415} 6416 6417% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6418\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6419\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6420 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6421 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6422 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6423} 6424 6425% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6426% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6427% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6428\let\section = \numberedsec 6429\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6430\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6431 6432% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6433 6434\def\majorheading{% 6435 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6436 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6437} 6438 6439\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6440\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6441 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6442 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6443 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6444} 6445 6446% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6447\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6448 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6449\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6450 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6451\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6452 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6453 6454% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6455% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6456% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6457 6458% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6459\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6460 6461% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6462\newskip\chapheadingskip 6463 6464% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6465\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6466 6467% Start a new page 6468\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6469 6470% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6471% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6472% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6473% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6474\def\chapoddpage{% 6475 \chappager 6476 \ifodd\pageno \else 6477 \begingroup 6478 \headingsoff 6479 \null 6480 \chappager 6481 \endgroup 6482 \fi 6483} 6484 6485\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6486 6487\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6488\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6489\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6490\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}} 6491 6492\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6493\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6494\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6495\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6496 6497\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6498\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6499\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6500\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6501 6502\CHAPPAGon 6503 6504% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6505% 6506% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6507% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6508% Not used for @heading series. 6509% 6510% To test against our argument. 6511\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6512\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6513\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6514% 6515\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6516 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6517 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6518 \fi 6519 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6520 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6521 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6522 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6523 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6524 % 6525 \def\temptype{#2}% 6526 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6527 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6528 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6529 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6530 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6531 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6532 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6533 \toks0={#1}% 6534 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6535 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6536 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6537 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6538 % commands in some of the translations. 6539 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6540 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6541 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6542 }% 6543 \else 6544 \toks0={#1}% 6545 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6546 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6547 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6548 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6549 % commands in some of the translations. 6550 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6551 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6552 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6553 }% 6554 \fi\fi\fi 6555 % 6556 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6557 % the preceding space. 6558 \safewhatsit\domark 6559 % 6560 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6561 \pchapsepmacro 6562 % 6563 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6564 % between here and the heading. 6565 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6566 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6567 \domark 6568 % 6569 {% 6570 \chapfonts \rm 6571 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6572 % 6573 % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6574 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6575 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6576 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6577 % 6578 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6579 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6580 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6581 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6582 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6583 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6584 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6585 \def\toctype{omit}% 6586 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6587 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6588 \def\toctype{app}% 6589 \else 6590 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6591 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6592 \fi\fi\fi 6593 % 6594 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6595 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6596 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6597 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6598 % 6599 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6600 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6601 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6602 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6603 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6604 \donoderef{#2}% 6605 % 6606 % Typeset the actual heading. 6607 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6608 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6609 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6610 }% 6611 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6612 \nobreak 6613} 6614 6615% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6616\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6617\def\centerparameters{% 6618 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6619 \leftskip = \rightskip 6620 \parfillskip = 0pt 6621} 6622 6623 6624% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6625% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6626% 6627\newskip\secheadingskip 6628\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6629 6630% Subsection titles. 6631\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6632\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6633 6634% Subsubsection titles. 6635\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6636\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6637 6638 6639% Print any size, any type, section title. 6640% 6641% #1 is the text of the title, 6642% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6643% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6644% #4 is the section number. 6645% 6646\def\seckeyword{sec} 6647% 6648\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6649 {% 6650 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6651 \def\temptype{#3}% 6652 % 6653 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6654 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6655 % dubious), but not the others. 6656 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6657 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6658 \fi 6659 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6660 % 6661 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6662 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6663 % 6664 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6665 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6666 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6667 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6668 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6669 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6670 \fi 6671 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6672 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6673 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6674 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6675 \toks0={#1}% 6676 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6677 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6678 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6679 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6680 % commands in some of the translations. 6681 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6682 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6683 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6684 }% 6685 \fi 6686 \else 6687 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6688 \toks0={#1}% 6689 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6690 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6691 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6692 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6693 % commands in some of the translations. 6694 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6695 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6696 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6697 }% 6698 \fi 6699 \fi\fi\fi 6700 % 6701 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6702 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6703 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6704 \par 6705 % 6706 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6707 % the preceding space. 6708 \safewhatsit\domark 6709 % 6710 % Insert space above the heading. 6711 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6712 % 6713 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6714 % between here and the heading. 6715 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6716 \domark 6717 % 6718 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6719 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6720 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6721 \def\toctype{unn}% 6722 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6723 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6724 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6725 % and don't redefine \currentsection. 6726 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6727 \def\toctype{omit}% 6728 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6729 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6730 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6731 \def\toctype{app}% 6732 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6733 \else 6734 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6735 \def\toctype{num}% 6736 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6737 \fi\fi\fi 6738 % 6739 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6740 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6741 % 6742 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6743 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6744 \donoderef{#3}% 6745 % 6746 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6747 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6748 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6749 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6750 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6751 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6752 \nobreak 6753 % 6754 % Output the actual section heading. 6755 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6756 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6757 \unhbox0 #1}% 6758 }% 6759 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6760 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6761 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6762 % 6763 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6764 % was followed by glue. 6765 \nobreak 6766 % 6767 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6768 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6769 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6770 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6771 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6772 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6773 \vskip-\parskip 6774 % 6775 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6776 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6777 % and do the needful. 6778 \penalty 10001 6779} 6780 6781 6782\message{toc,} 6783% Table of contents. 6784\newwrite\tocfile 6785 6786% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6787% Called from @chapter, etc. 6788% 6789% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6790% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6791% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6792% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6793% destination to jump to. 6794% 6795% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6796% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6797% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6798% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6799% 6800\newif\iftocfileopened 6801\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6802% 6803\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6804 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6805 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6806 \iftocfileopened\else 6807 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6808 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6809 \fi 6810 % 6811 \iflinks 6812 {\atdummies 6813 \edef\temp{% 6814 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6815 \temp 6816 }% 6817 \fi 6818 \fi 6819 % 6820 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6821 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6822 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6823 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6824 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6825 % `1', and two named `2'. 6826 \ifpdforxetex 6827 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6828 \fi 6829} 6830 6831 6832% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6833% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6834% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6835% 6836\def\activecatcodes{% 6837 \catcode`\"=\active 6838 \catcode`\$=\active 6839 \catcode`\<=\active 6840 \catcode`\>=\active 6841 \catcode`\\=\active 6842 \catcode`\^=\active 6843 \catcode`\_=\active 6844 \catcode`\|=\active 6845 \catcode`\~=\active 6846} 6847 6848 6849% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6850\def\readtocfile{% 6851 \setupdatafile 6852 \activecatcodes 6853 \input \tocreadfilename 6854} 6855 6856\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6857\newcount\savepageno 6858\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6859 6860% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6861% 6862\def\startcontents#1{% 6863 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6864 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. 6865 \contentsalignmacro 6866 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6867 % 6868 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6869 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6870 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6871 % 6872 \savepageno = \pageno 6873 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6874 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6875 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6876 % 6877 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6878 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6879 \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings 6880 % Record where the Roman numerals started. 6881 \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi 6882} 6883 6884% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6885% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6886% 6887\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6888 6889% Normal (long) toc. 6890% 6891\def\contents{% 6892 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6893 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6894 \ifeof 1 \else 6895 \readtocfile 6896 \fi 6897 \vfill \eject 6898 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6899 \ifeof 1 \else 6900 \pdfmakeoutlines 6901 \fi 6902 \closein 1 6903 \endgroup 6904 \contentsendroman 6905} 6906 6907% And just the chapters. 6908\def\summarycontents{% 6909 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6910 % 6911 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6912 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6913 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6914 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6915 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6916 \secfonts 6917 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6918 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6919 \rm 6920 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6921 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6922 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6923 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6924 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6925 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6926 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6927 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6928 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6929 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6930 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6931 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6932 \ifeof 1 \else 6933 \readtocfile 6934 \fi 6935 \closein 1 6936 \vfill \eject 6937 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6938 \endgroup 6939 \contentsendroman 6940} 6941\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6942 6943% Get ready to use Arabic numerals again 6944\def\contentsendroman{% 6945 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6946 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6947 % 6948 % If \romancount > \arabiccount, the contents are at the end of the 6949 % document. Otherwise, advance where the Arabic numerals start for 6950 % the page numbers. 6951 \ifnum\romancount>\arabiccount\else\global\arabiccount=\pagecount\fi 6952} 6953 6954% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6955% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6956% 6957\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6958 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6959 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6960 % But use \hss just in case. 6961 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6962 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6963 % 6964 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6965 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6966 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6967 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6968 % there are before deciding ... 6969 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6970} 6971 6972% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6973% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6974% The last argument is the page number. 6975% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6976 6977% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6978% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6979% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6980\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6981\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6982 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6983 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6984 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6985 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6986 \penalty-300 6987 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6988 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6989} 6990% 6991% Parts, in the short toc. 6992\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6993 \penalty-300 6994 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6995 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6996} 6997 6998% Chapters, in the main contents. 6999\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7000 7001% Chapters, in the short toc. 7002% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 7003\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 7004 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 7005} 7006 7007% Appendices, in the main contents. 7008% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 7009% 7010\def\appendixbox#1{% 7011 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 7012 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 7013 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 7014% 7015\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 7016 7017% Unnumbered chapters. 7018\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 7019\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 7020 7021% Sections. 7022\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7023\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 7024\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 7025 7026% Subsections. 7027\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7028\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 7029\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 7030 7031% And subsubsections. 7032\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 7033\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 7034\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 7035 7036% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 7037% Same as \defaultparindent. 7038\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 7039 7040% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 7041% page number. 7042% 7043% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 7044% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 7045\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 7046 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 7047 \begingroup 7048 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 7049 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 7050 \chapentryfonts 7051 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7052 \endgroup 7053 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 7054} 7055 7056\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7057 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 7058 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7059\endgroup} 7060 7061\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7062 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 7063 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7064\endgroup} 7065 7066\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7067 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 7068 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7069\endgroup} 7070 7071% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 7072\let\tocentry = \entry 7073 7074% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 7075\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 7076 7077\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7078\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7079 7080\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 7081\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 7082\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7083\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7084 7085 7086\message{environments,} 7087% @foo ... @end foo. 7088 7089% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 7090% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 7091% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 7092 7093\envdef\tex{% 7094 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 7095 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 7096 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 7097 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 7098 \catcode `\%=14 7099 \catcode `\+=\other 7100 \catcode `\"=\other 7101 \catcode `\|=\other 7102 \catcode `\<=\other 7103 \catcode `\>=\other 7104 \catcode `\`=\other 7105 \catcode `\'=\other 7106 % 7107 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7108 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7109 \mathactive 7110 % 7111 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7112 \let\b=\ptexb 7113 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7114 \let\c=\ptexc 7115 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7116 \let\.=\ptexdot 7117 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7118 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7119 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7120 \let\i=\ptexi 7121 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7122 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7123 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7124 \let\+=\tabalign 7125 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7126 \let\/=\ptexslash 7127 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7128 \let\*=\ptexstar 7129 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7130 \let\t=\ptext 7131 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7132 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7133 % 7134 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7135 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7136 \def\@{@}% 7137} 7138% There is no need to define \Etex. 7139 7140% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7141% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7142% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7143 7144% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7145\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7146 7147% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7148% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7149% have any width. 7150\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7151 7152% This space is always present above and below environments. 7153\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7154 7155% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7156% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7157% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7158% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7159% 7160\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7161 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7162 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7163 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7164 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7165 \endgraf 7166 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7167 \removelastskip 7168 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7169 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7170 % often leads into it. 7171 \penalty100 7172 \fi 7173 \vskip\envskipamount 7174 \fi 7175 \fi 7176}} 7177 7178\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7179 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7180 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7181 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7182 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7183 \endgraf 7184 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7185 \removelastskip 7186 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7187 % or better ... 7188 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7189 \vskip\envskipamount 7190 \fi 7191 \fi 7192}} 7193 7194% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7195% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7196\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7197 7198% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7199% environment contents. 7200 7201% 7202\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7203\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7204\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7205\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7206\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7207 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7208 \hskip\rskip}} 7209\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7210 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7211 \hskip\rskip}} 7212% 7213\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7214 7215% only require the font if @cartouche is actually used 7216\def\cartouchefontdefs{% 7217 \font\circle=lcircle10\relax 7218 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7219} 7220\newdimen\circthick 7221\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7222\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7223 7224 7225\envdef\cartouche{% 7226 \cartouchefontdefs 7227 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7228 \startsavinginserts 7229 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7230 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7231 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7232 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7233 \cartouter=\hsize 7234 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7235 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7236 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7237 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7238 % 7239 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7240 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7241 % collide with the section heading. 7242 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7243 % 7244 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7245 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7246 \carttop 7247 \hbox\bgroup 7248 \hskip\lskip 7249 \vrule\kern3pt 7250 \vbox\bgroup 7251 \kern3pt 7252 \hsize=\cartinner 7253 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7254 \lineskip=\normlskip 7255 \parskip=\normpskip 7256 \vskip -\parskip 7257 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7258} 7259\def\Ecartouche{% 7260 \ifhmode\par\fi 7261 \kern3pt 7262 \egroup 7263 \kern3pt\vrule 7264 \hskip\rskip 7265 \egroup 7266 \cartbot 7267 \egroup 7268 \addgroupbox 7269 \checkinserts 7270} 7271 7272 7273% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7274% inside a group. 7275\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7276\def\nonfillstart{% 7277 \aboveenvbreak 7278 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7279 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7280 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7281 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7282 \parskip = 0pt 7283 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7284 % the normal \indent. 7285 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7286 \parindent = 0pt 7287 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7288 % 7289 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7290 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7291 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7292 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7293 \else 7294 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7295 \fi 7296 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7297} 7298 7299\begingroup 7300\obeyspaces 7301% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7302% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7303% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7304% @indent. 7305\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7306\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7307\ifx\temp % 7308\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7309\else% 7310\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7311\fi% 7312}% 7313\endgroup 7314\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7315\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7316 7317% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7318% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7319% This affects the following displayed environments: 7320% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7321% 7322\def\smallword{small} 7323\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7324\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7325\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7326 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7327 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7328 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7329 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7330 % to change the fonts afterward. 7331 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7332 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7333 \fi 7334} 7335\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7336 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7337 \else 7338 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7339 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7340 \fi 7341} 7342 7343% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7344% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7345\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7346 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7347 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7348 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7349 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7350} 7351 7352% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7353\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7354 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7355 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7356} 7357% 7358% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7359% @example: same as @lisp. 7360% 7361% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7362% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7363% 7364\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7365 \nonfillstart 7366 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7367 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7368 \gobble % eat return 7369} 7370% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7371% 7372\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7373 \nonfillstart 7374 \gobble 7375} 7376 7377% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7378% 7379\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7380 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7381 \nonfillstart 7382 \gobble 7383} 7384 7385% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7386\envdef\flushleft{% 7387 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7388 \nonfillstart 7389 \gobble 7390} 7391\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7392 7393% @flushright. 7394% 7395\envdef\flushright{% 7396 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7397 \nonfillstart 7398 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7399 \gobble 7400} 7401\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7402 7403 7404% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7405% justification. From plain.tex. 7406\envdef\raggedright{% 7407 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7408} 7409\let\Eraggedright\par 7410 7411\envdef\raggedleft{% 7412 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7413 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7414 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7415 % badness reporting. 7416} 7417\let\Eraggedleft\par 7418 7419\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7420 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7421 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7422 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7423 % badness reporting. 7424} 7425\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7426 7427 7428% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7429% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7430% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7431% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7432% 7433\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7434% 7435\def\quotationstart{% 7436 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7437 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7438 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7439 \fi 7440 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7441} 7442 7443% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7444% doing normal filling. 7445% 7446\def\Equotation{% 7447 \par 7448 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7449 % indent a bit. 7450 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7451 \fi 7452 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7453} 7454\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7455 7456% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7457\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7458 \def\temp{#1}% 7459 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7460 {\bf #1: }% 7461 \fi 7462} 7463 7464% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7465% has no optional argument. 7466% 7467\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7468% 7469\def\indentedblockstart{% 7470 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7471 \parindent=0pt 7472 % 7473 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7474 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7475 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7476 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7477 \else 7478 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7479 \fi 7480} 7481 7482% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7483% 7484\def\Eindentedblock{% 7485 \par 7486 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7487} 7488\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7489 7490 7491% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7492% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7493% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7494% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7495% 7496% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7497% 7498% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7499% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7500% verbatim line. 7501\def\dospecials{% 7502 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7503 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7504 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7505 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7506 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7507 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7508 %\do\`\do\'% 7509} 7510% 7511% [Knuth] p. 380 7512\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7513 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7514% 7515% Setup for the @verb command. 7516% 7517% Eight spaces for a tab 7518\begingroup 7519 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7520 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7521\endgroup 7522% 7523\def\setupverb{% 7524 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7525 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7526 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7527 \tabeightspaces 7528 % Respect line breaks, 7529 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7530 % make each space count 7531 % must do in this order: 7532 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7533} 7534 7535% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7536% 7537% Real tab expansion. 7538\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7539% 7540% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7541% tabs. 7542\newbox\verbbox 7543\def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7544% 7545\begingroup 7546 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7547 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7548 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7549 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7550 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7551 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7552 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7553 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7554 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox 7555 \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox 7556 }% 7557 } 7558\endgroup 7559 7560% start the verbatim environment. 7561\def\setupverbatim{% 7562 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7563 \nonfillstart 7564 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7565 \def\par{\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}% 7566 \tabexpand 7567 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7568 % Respect line breaks, 7569 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7570 % make each space count. 7571 % Must do in this order: 7572 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7573} 7574 7575% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7576% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7577% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7578% 7579% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7580% 7581% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7582\begingroup 7583 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7584 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7585\endgroup 7586% 7587\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7588% 7589% 7590% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7591% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7592% 7593% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7594% 7595% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7596% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7597% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7598% 7599% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7600% 7601\begingroup 7602 \catcode`\ =\active 7603 \obeylines % 7604 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7605 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7606 % line in the output. 7607 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{% 7608 \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7609 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7610 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7611 % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in 7612 % the block. 7613\endgroup 7614% 7615\envdef\verbatim{% 7616 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7617} 7618\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7619 7620 7621% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7622% 7623\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7624% 7625\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7626 {% 7627 \makevalueexpandable 7628 \setupverbatim 7629 {% 7630 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7631 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7632 \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 } 7633 \expandafter 7634 }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup 7635 \afterenvbreak 7636 }% 7637} 7638 7639% @copying ... @end copying. 7640% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7641% 7642% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7643% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7644% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7645% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7646% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7647% possible is desirable. 7648% 7649\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7650\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7651% 7652\def\insertcopying{% 7653 \begingroup 7654 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7655 \scanexp\copyingtext 7656 \endgroup 7657} 7658 7659 7660\message{defuns,} 7661% @defun etc. 7662 7663\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7664\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7665\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7666\newcount\defunpenalty 7667 7668% Start the processing of @deffn: 7669\def\startdefun{% 7670 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7671 \medbreak 7672 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7673 % following @def command, see below. 7674 \else 7675 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7676 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7677 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7678 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7679 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7680 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7681 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7682 % 7683 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7684 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7685 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7686 % @def command. 7687 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7688 % 7689 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7690 % But do insert the glue. 7691 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7692 \fi 7693 % 7694 \parindent=0in 7695 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7696 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7697} 7698 7699\def\dodefunx#1{% 7700 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7701 \checkenv#1% 7702 % 7703 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7704 % It's not a great place, though. 7705 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7706 % 7707 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7708 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7709} 7710\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7711 7712% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7713% 7714\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7715 \begingroup 7716 % call \deffnheader: 7717 #1#2 \endheader 7718 % common ending: 7719 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7720 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7721 \endgraf 7722 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7723 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7724 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7725 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7726 \checkparencounts 7727 \endgroup 7728} 7729 7730\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7731 7732% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7733% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7734% 7735\def\makedefun#1{% 7736 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7737 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7738 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7739 \temp 7740} 7741 7742% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7743% 7744% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7745% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7746% 7747\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7748 \envdef#1{% 7749 \startdefun 7750 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7751 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7752 }% 7753 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7754 \def#3% 7755} 7756 7757\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7758\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7759 7760% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7761% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7762% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7763% 7764\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7765 \def\temp{#1}% 7766 \ifx\temp\onword 7767 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7768 = \empty 7769 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7770 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7771 = \relax 7772 \else 7773 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7774 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7775 must be on|off}% 7776 \fi\fi 7777} 7778 7779% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 7780% 7781% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind. 7782% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an 7783% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in 7784% behaviour though.) 7785\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 7786 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 7787 \ifx\thirdarg\empty 7788 \doind{#1}{#2}% 7789 \else 7790 \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}% 7791 \fi 7792} 7793 7794% Untyped functions: 7795 7796% @deffn category name args 7797\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7798 7799% @deffn category class name args 7800\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7801 7802% \defopon {category on}class name args 7803\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7804 7805% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7806% 7807\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7808 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7809 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7810} 7811 7812% Typed functions: 7813 7814% @deftypefn category type name args 7815\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7816 7817% @deftypeop category class type name args 7818\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7819 7820% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7821\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7822 7823% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7824% 7825\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7826 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7827 \doingtypefntrue 7828 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7829} 7830 7831% Typed variables: 7832 7833% @deftypevr category type var args 7834\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7835 7836% @deftypecv category class type var args 7837\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7838 7839% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7840\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7841 7842% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7843% 7844\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7845 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7846 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7847} 7848 7849% Untyped variables: 7850 7851% @defvr category var args 7852\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7853 7854% @defcv category class var args 7855\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7856 7857% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7858\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7859 7860% Types: 7861 7862% @deftp category name args 7863\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7864 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7865 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7866} 7867 7868% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7869\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7870\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7871\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7872\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7873\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7874\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7875\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7876\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7877\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7878\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7879\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7880 7881% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7882% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7883% #2 is the return type, if any. 7884% #3 is the function name. 7885% 7886% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7887% 7888\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7889 \par 7890 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7891 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7892 % 7893 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7894 % on a line by itself. 7895 \rettypeownlinefalse 7896 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7897 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7898 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7899 \rettypeownlinetrue 7900 \fi 7901 \fi 7902 % 7903 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7904 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7905 % just below it. 7906 \def\temp{#1}% 7907 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7908 % 7909 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7910 % least two. 7911 \tempnum = 2 7912 % 7913 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7914 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7915 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7916 % 7917 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7918 \ifrettypeownline 7919 \advance\tempnum by 1 7920 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7921 \else 7922 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7923 \fi 7924 % 7925 % The continuations: 7926 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7927 % 7928 % The final paragraph shape: 7929 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7930 % 7931 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7932 \noindent 7933 \hbox to 0pt{% 7934 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7935 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7936 \kern\leftskip 7937 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7938 }% 7939 % 7940 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7941 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7942 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7943 {% 7944 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7945 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7946 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7947 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7948 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7949 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7950 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7951 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7952 \df \tt 7953 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7954 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7955 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7956 \ifrettypeownline 7957 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7958 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7959 \else 7960 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7961 \fi 7962 \fi % no return type 7963 #3% output function name 7964 }% 7965 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7966 % 7967 \boldbrax 7968 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7969} 7970 7971% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7972% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7973% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7974% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7975% 7976\def\defunargs#1{% 7977 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7978 % tt for the names. 7979 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7980 % 7981 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7982 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7983 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7984 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7985 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7986 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7987 #1% 7988 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7989} 7990 7991% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7992% 7993\def\activeparens{% 7994 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7995 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7996 \catcode`\&=\active 7997} 7998 7999% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 8000\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 8001 8002% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 8003% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 8004% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 8005{ 8006 \activeparens 8007 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 8008 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 8009 \global\let& = \& 8010 8011 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 8012 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 8013} 8014\let\ampchar\& 8015 8016\newcount\parencount 8017 8018% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 8019\newif\ifampseen 8020\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 8021 8022\def\parenfont{% 8023 \ifampseen 8024 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 8025 % otherwise use the default font. 8026 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 8027 \else 8028 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 8029 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 8030 \sf 8031 \fi 8032} 8033\def\infirstlevel#1{% 8034 \ifampseen 8035 \ifnum\parencount=1 8036 #1% 8037 \fi 8038 \fi 8039} 8040\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 8041 8042\def\opnr{% 8043 \global\advance\parencount by 1 8044 {\parenfont(}% 8045 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 8046} 8047\def\clnr{% 8048 {\parenfont)}% 8049 \infirstlevel \sl 8050 \global\advance\parencount by -1 8051} 8052 8053\newcount\brackcount 8054\def\lbrb{% 8055 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 8056 {\bf[}% 8057} 8058\def\rbrb{% 8059 {\bf]}% 8060 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 8061} 8062 8063\def\checkparencounts{% 8064 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 8065 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 8066} 8067% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 8068% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 8069\def\badparencount{% 8070 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 8071 \global\parencount=0 8072} 8073\def\badbrackcount{% 8074 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 8075 \global\brackcount=0 8076} 8077 8078 8079\message{macros,} 8080% @macro. 8081 8082% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 8083% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 8084\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8085 \newwrite\macscribble 8086 \def\scantokens#1{% 8087 \toks0={#1}% 8088 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 8089 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 8090 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 8091 \input \jobname.tmp 8092 } 8093\fi 8094 8095% Used at the time of macro expansion. 8096% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 8097\def\scanmacro#1{% 8098 \newlinechar`\^^M 8099 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 8100 % 8101 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8102 \scantokens{#1@comment}% 8103 % 8104 % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8105 % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla 8106 % in math mode. 8107} 8108 8109% Used for copying and captions 8110\def\scanexp#1{% 8111 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8112} 8113 8114\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8115\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8116\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8117 8118% List of all defined macros in the form 8119% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8120% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8121% if there is a need. 8122\def\macrolist{} 8123 8124% Add the macro to \macrolist 8125\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8126\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8127 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8128 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8129} 8130 8131% Utility routines. 8132% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8133% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8134% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8135% 8136\def\cslet#1#2{% 8137 \expandafter\let 8138 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8139 \csname#2\endcsname 8140} 8141 8142% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8143% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8144{\catcode`\@=11 8145\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8146\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8147\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8148\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8149\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8150} 8151 8152% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8153{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8154\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8155\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8156\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8157} 8158 8159% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8160% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8161% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8162% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8163% 8164% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8165% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8166% confine the change to the current group. 8167% 8168% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8169% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8170% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8171% 8172\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8173 \catcode`\"=\other 8174 \catcode`\+=\other 8175 \catcode`\<=\other 8176 \catcode`\>=\other 8177 \catcode`\^=\other 8178 \catcode`\_=\other 8179 \catcode`\|=\other 8180 \catcode`\~=\other 8181 \passthroughcharstrue 8182} 8183 8184\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8185 \scanctxt 8186 \catcode`\@=\other 8187 \catcode`\\=\other 8188 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8189} 8190 8191\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8192 \scanctxt 8193 \catcode`\ =\other 8194 \catcode`\@=\other 8195 \catcode`\{=\other 8196 \catcode`\}=\other 8197 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8198 \usembodybackslash 8199} 8200 8201% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8202% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8203% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8204\def\macroargctxt{% 8205 \scanctxt 8206 \catcode`\ =\active 8207 \catcode`\@=\other 8208 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8209 \catcode`\\=\active 8210} 8211 8212\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8213 \scanctxt 8214 \catcode`\@=\other 8215 \catcode`\{=\other 8216 \catcode`\}=\other 8217} 8218 8219% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8220% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8221% where N is the macro parameter number. 8222% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8223% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8224% 8225{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8226 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8227 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8228} 8229\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8230 8231\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8232 8233\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8234\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8235 8236\def\macroxxx#1{% 8237 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8238 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8239 \paramno=0\relax 8240 \else 8241 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8242 \if\paramno>256\relax 8243 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8244 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8245 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8246 \fi 8247 \fi 8248 \fi 8249 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8250 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8251 \else 8252 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8253 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8254 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8255 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8256 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8257 \fi 8258 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8259 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8260 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8261 \fi} 8262 8263\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8264 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8265 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8266 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8267 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8268 \begingroup 8269 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8270 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8271 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8272 \endgroup 8273 \else 8274 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8275 \fi 8276} 8277 8278% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8279% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8280% 8281\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8282 \ifx #1\relax 8283 % remove this 8284 \else 8285 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8286 \fi 8287} 8288 8289% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8290% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8291\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8292\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8293\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8294\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8295% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8296% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8297% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8298 8299% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8300% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8301% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8302% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8303% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8304% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8305% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8306% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8307% 8308% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8309% 8310% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8311% \parsemmanyargdef. 8312% 8313\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8314 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8315 \let\hash\relax 8316 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8317 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8318 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8319 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8320 \paramno0\relax 8321 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8322 \fi 8323} 8324\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8325 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8326 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8327 \advance\paramno by 1 8328 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8329 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8330 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8331 \fi\next} 8332 8333% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8334% 8335% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8336% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8337% 8338% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8339% body to be transformed. 8340% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8341% 8342{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8343\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8344{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8345\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8346 8347% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8348\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8349\catcode `@=11\relax 8350 8351%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8352 8353% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8354% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8355% processed again to replace the arguments. 8356% 8357% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8358% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8359% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8360% 8361% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8362% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8363% 8364% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8365% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8366% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8367% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8368% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8369% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8370\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8371 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8372 \else 8373 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8374 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8375 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8376 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8377 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8378 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8379 % \xdef . 8380 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8381 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8382 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8383 \fi\next} 8384 8385 8386\let\endargs@\relax 8387\let\nil@\relax 8388\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8389\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8390 8391% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8392% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8393% macarg.ARGNAME 8394% 8395% #1 is the macro name 8396% #2 is the list of argument names 8397% #3 is the list of argument values 8398\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8399 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8400 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8401 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8402 \def\macroname{#1}% 8403 \begingroup 8404 \macroargctxt 8405 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8406 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8407 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8408 \setemptyargvalues@ 8409 \else 8410 \getargvals@@ 8411 \fi 8412} 8413\def\getargvals@@{% 8414 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8415 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8416 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8417 \else 8418 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8419 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8420 \fi 8421 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8422 \else 8423 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8424 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8425 % macros to empty. 8426 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8427 \else 8428 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8429 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8430 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8431 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8432 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8433 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8434 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8435 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8436 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8437 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8438 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8439 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8440 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8441 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8442 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8443 \fi 8444 \fi 8445 \next 8446} 8447 8448\def\push@#1#2{% 8449 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8450 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8451 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8452 \expandafter#1#2}% 8453} 8454 8455% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8456% in macro \@tempa. 8457% 8458\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8459 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8460 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8461 % values into respective token registers. 8462 % 8463 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8464 \begingroup 8465 \paramno0\relax 8466 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8467 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8468 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8469 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8470 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8471 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8472 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8473 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8474 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8475 % group. 8476 \expandafter 8477 \endgroup 8478 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8479 } 8480 8481% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8482% 8483\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8484 \expandafter 8485 \endgroup 8486 \macargdeflist@ 8487 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8488 % is in \@tempa . 8489 \macvalstoargs@ 8490 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8491 % with \@tempb . 8492 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8493 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8494 % \egroup . 8495 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8496 \let\@tempc\relax 8497 \else 8498 \let\@tempc\egroup 8499 \fi 8500 % And now we do the real job: 8501 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8502 \@tempd 8503} 8504 8505\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8506 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8507 \else 8508 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8509 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8510 % alias \@tempb . 8511 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8512 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8513 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8514 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8515 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8516 \fi 8517 \next 8518} 8519 8520% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8521% 8522\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8523 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8524 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8525 \else 8526 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8527 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8528 \fi 8529 \next 8530} 8531 8532\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8533 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8534 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8535 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8536 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8537} 8538 8539% #1 is the element target macro 8540% #2 is the list macro 8541% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8542\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8543 \def#1{#3}% 8544 \def#2{#4}% 8545} 8546\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8547 \long\def#1{#3}% 8548 \long\def#2{#4}% 8549} 8550 8551 8552%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8553 8554 8555% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8556% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8557% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8558% \paramno is the number of parameters 8559% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8560% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8561% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8562% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8563% 8564\def\defmacro{% 8565 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8566 \ifnum\paramno=1 8567 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8568 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8569 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8570 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8571 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8572 \else 8573 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8574 \fi 8575 \ifcase\paramno 8576 % 0 8577 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8578 \bgroup 8579 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8580 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8581 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8582 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8583 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8584 \egroup 8585 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8586 \or % 1 8587 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8588 \bgroup 8589 \noexpand\braceorline 8590 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8591 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8592 \egroup 8593 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8594 }% 8595 \else % at most 9 8596 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8597 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8598 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8599 % comma. 8600 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8601 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8602 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8603 \bgroup 8604 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8605 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8606 \noexpand\expandafter 8607 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8608 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8609 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8610 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8611 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8612 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8613 \expandafter\expandafter 8614 \expandafter\xdef 8615 \expandafter\expandafter 8616 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8617 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8618 \else % 10 or more: 8619 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8620 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8621 }% 8622 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8623 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8624 \fi 8625 \fi} 8626 8627\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8628 8629\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8630 8631 8632%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8633% 8634{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8635@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8636@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8637 8638% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8639% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8640% compressed to one. 8641% 8642% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8643% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8644% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8645% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8646% 8647% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8648% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8649% 8650% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8651% 8652% where: 8653% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8654% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8655% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8656% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8657 8658@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8659 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8660} 8661@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8662 8663% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8664% #2 - PENDING_BS 8665% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8666% #4 used to look ahead 8667% 8668% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8669% otherwise, remove the next token. 8670@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8671 @ifx#4\% 8672 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8673 @else 8674 @expandafter@add_segment 8675 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8676} 8677 8678% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8679% #2 - PENDING_BS 8680% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8681% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8682% #5 looks ahead 8683% 8684% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8685@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8686 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8687} 8688 8689@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8690 8691% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8692% #2 - PENDING_BS 8693% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8694% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8695% 8696% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8697% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8698% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8699% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8700% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8701% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8702% added to ARG_RESULT. 8703@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8704@ifx#3@_finish 8705 @call_the_macro#1!% 8706@else 8707 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8708 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8709 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8710 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8711 % long #4 is. 8712} 8713 8714% #1 - THE_MACRO 8715% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8716% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8717% conditional. 8718@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8719 8720} 8721%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8722 8723% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8724% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8725% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8726% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8727% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8728% 8729\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8730\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8731 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8732 \macroargctxt 8733 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8734 \else 8735 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8736 \fi \macnamexxx} 8737 8738 8739% @alias. 8740% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8741% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8742% 8743\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8744\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8745\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8746 {% 8747 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8748 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8749 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8750 }% 8751 \next 8752} 8753 8754 8755\message{cross references,} 8756 8757\newwrite\auxfile 8758\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8759\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8760 8761% @inforef is relatively simple. 8762\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8763\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8764 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8765 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8766 8767% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8768% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8769% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8770% @node foo , bar , ... 8771% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8772% 8773\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8774% 8775% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8776% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8777\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8778\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode} 8779 8780% Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex 8781% conditional. 8782% \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need 8783% that here. 8784\def\omittopnode{% 8785 \ifx\lastnode\wordTop 8786 \expandafter\ignorenode\fi 8787} 8788\def\wordTop{Top} 8789 8790% Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not 8791% output. 8792\def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}% 8793\ignorenodebye 8794} 8795 8796{\let\bye\relax 8797\gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef} 8798\gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}} 8799% The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer 8800 8801\let\lastnode=\empty 8802 8803% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8804% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8805% 8806\def\donoderef#1{% 8807 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8808 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8809 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8810 \fi 8811} 8812 8813% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8814% 8815\newcount\savesfregister 8816% 8817\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8818\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8819\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8820 8821% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8822% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8823% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection, 8824% or the anchor name. 8825% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8826% empty for anchors. 8827% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8828% 8829% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8830% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8831% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8832% 8833\def\setref#1#2{% 8834 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8835 \iflinks 8836 {% 8837 \requireauxfile 8838 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8839 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8840 \def\value##1{##1}% 8841 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8842 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8843 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8844 }% 8845 \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}% 8846 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8847 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8848 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8849 }% 8850 \fi 8851} 8852 8853% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8854% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8855% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8856% variable, now it's official. 8857% 8858\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8859 \def\temp{#1}% 8860 \ifx\temp\onword 8861 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8862 = \empty 8863 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8864 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8865 = \relax 8866 \else 8867 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8868 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8869 must be on|off}% 8870 \fi\fi 8871} 8872 8873% 8874% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8875% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8876% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8877% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8878% 8879\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8880\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8881\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8882 8883\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8884\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8885% 8886\newbox\toprefbox 8887\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8888\newbox\infofilenamebox 8889\newbox\printedmanualbox 8890% 8891\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8892 \unsepspaces 8893 % 8894 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8895 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8896 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8897 % 8898 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8899 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8900 % 8901 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8902 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8903 % 8904 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8905 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8906 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8907 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8908 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8909 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8910 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8911 \else 8912 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8913 % the square brackets if we have it. 8914 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8915 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8916 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8917 \else 8918 \ifhavexrefs 8919 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8920 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8921 \else 8922 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8923 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8924 \fi% 8925 \fi 8926 \fi 8927 \fi 8928 % 8929 % Make link in pdf output. 8930 \ifpdf 8931 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8932 {\indexnofonts 8933 \makevalueexpandable 8934 \turnoffactive 8935 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8936 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8937 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8938 \getfilename{#4}% 8939 % 8940 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8941 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8942 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8943 % 8944 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8945 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8946 \fi 8947 % 8948 \leavevmode 8949 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8950 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8951 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8952 \else 8953 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8954 \fi 8955 }% 8956 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8957 \else 8958 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8959 \else 8960 % For XeTeX 8961 {\indexnofonts 8962 \makevalueexpandable 8963 \turnoffactive 8964 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8965 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8966 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8967 \getfilename{#4}% 8968 % 8969 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8970 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8971 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8972 % 8973 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8974 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8975 \fi 8976 % 8977 \leavevmode 8978 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8979 % With default settings, 8980 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8981 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8982 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8983 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8984 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8985 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8986 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8987 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8988 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8989 \else 8990 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8991 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8992 \fi 8993 }% 8994 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8995 \fi 8996 \fi 8997 {% 8998 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8999 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 9000 \indexnofonts 9001 \turnoffactive 9002 \def\value##1{##1}% 9003 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 9004 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 9005 }% 9006 % 9007 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 9008 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 9009 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 9010 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 9011 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 9012 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 9013 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 9014 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 9015 \else 9016 \printedrefname 9017 \fi 9018 % 9019 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 9020 % "in MANUALNAME". 9021 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 9022 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 9023 \fi 9024 \else 9025 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 9026 % 9027 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 9028 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 9029 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 9030 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 9031 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 9032 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 9033 % 9034 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 9035 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 9036 % 9037 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 9038 % 9039 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 9040 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 9041 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 9042 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 9043 % 9044 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 9045 % 9046 \else 9047 % Reference within this manual. 9048 % 9049 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 9050 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 9051 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 9052 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 9053 % 9054 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 9055 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 9056 % 9057 % But we always want a comma and a space: 9058 ,\space 9059 % 9060 % output the `page 3'. 9061 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 9062 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 9063 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 9064 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 9065 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 9066 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 9067 \else\ifx\ 9068 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 9069 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 9070 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 9071 \fi\fi 9072 \fi 9073 \endlink 9074\endgroup} 9075 9076% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 9077% 9078% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 9079% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 9080% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 9081% 9082% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 9083% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 9084% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 9085% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 9086% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 9087% 9088% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 9089% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 9090% 9091\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 9092 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 9093 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 9094 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 9095 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9096 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9097 \fi 9098 \fi 9099 #1% 9100} 9101 9102% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9103% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9104% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9105% one that Bob is working on :). 9106% 9107\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9108 9109% Things referred to by \setref. 9110% 9111\def\Ynothing{} 9112\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9113\def\Ynumbered{% 9114 \ifnum\secno=0 9115 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9116 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9117 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9118 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9119 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9120 \else 9121 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9122 \fi\fi\fi 9123} 9124\def\Yappendix{% 9125 \ifnum\secno=0 9126 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9127 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9128 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9129 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9130 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9131 \else 9132 \putwordSection@tie 9133 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9134 \fi\fi\fi 9135} 9136 9137% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9138% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9139\def\refx#1#2{% 9140 \requireauxfile 9141 {% 9142 \indexnofonts 9143 \turnoffactive 9144 \def\value##1{##1}% 9145 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9146 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9147 }% 9148 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9149 % If not defined, say something at least. 9150 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9151 \iflinks 9152 \ifhavexrefs 9153 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9154 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9155 \else 9156 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9157 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9158 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9159 \fi 9160 \fi 9161 \fi 9162 \else 9163 % It's defined, so just use it. 9164 \thisrefX 9165 \fi 9166 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9167} 9168 9169% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9170% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9171% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9172% type, we have more work to do. 9173% 9174\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9175 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9176 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9177 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9178 \indexnofonts 9179 \turnoffactive 9180 \def\value##1{##1}% 9181 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9182 }% 9183 % 9184 \bgroup 9185 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9186 \egroup 9187 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9188 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9189 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9190 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9191 % 9192 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9193 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9194 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9195 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9196 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9197 % 9198 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9199 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9200 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9201 \else 9202 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9203 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9204 \fi 9205 % 9206 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9207 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9208 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9209 {\safexrefname}}% 9210 \fi 9211} 9212 9213% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9214% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9215% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9216% 9217\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9218\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9219 9220% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9221\def\requireauxfile{% 9222 \iflinks 9223 \tryauxfile 9224 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9225 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9226 \fi 9227 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9228} 9229 9230% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9231% 9232\def\tryauxfile{% 9233 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9234 \ifeof 1 \else 9235 \readdatafile{aux}% 9236 \global\havexrefstrue 9237 \fi 9238 \closein 1 9239} 9240 9241\def\setupdatafile{% 9242 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9243 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9244 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9245 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9246 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9247 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9248 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9249 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9250 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9251 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9252 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9253 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9254 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9255 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9256 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9257 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9258 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9259 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9260 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9261 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9262 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9263 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9264 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9265 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9266 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9267 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9268 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9269 \catcode`\^=\other 9270 % 9271 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9272 \catcode`\~=\other 9273 \catcode`\[=\other 9274 \catcode`\]=\other 9275 \catcode`\"=\other 9276 \catcode`\_=\other 9277 \catcode`\|=\other 9278 \catcode`\<=\other 9279 \catcode`\>=\other 9280 \catcode`\$=\other 9281 \catcode`\#=\other 9282 \catcode`\&=\other 9283 \catcode`\%=\other 9284 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9285 % 9286 \catcode`\\=\active 9287 % 9288 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9289 \catcode`\{=1 9290 \catcode`\}=2 9291 \catcode`\@=0 9292} 9293 9294\def\readdatafile#1{% 9295\begingroup 9296 \setupdatafile 9297 \input\jobname.#1 9298\endgroup} 9299 9300 9301\message{insertions,} 9302% including footnotes. 9303 9304\newcount \footnoteno 9305 9306% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9307% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9308% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9309% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9310% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9311\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9312 9313% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9314\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9315 9316{\catcode `\@=11 9317% 9318% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9319\gdef\footnote{% 9320 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9321 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9322 % 9323 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9324 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9325 \let\@sf\empty 9326 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9327 % 9328 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9329 \unskip 9330 \thisfootno\@sf 9331 \dofootnote 9332}% 9333 9334% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9335% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9336% 9337% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9338% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9339% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9340% 9341\gdef\dofootnote{% 9342 \insert\footins\bgroup 9343 % 9344 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9345 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9346 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9347 % 9348 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9349 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9350 % So reset some parameters. 9351 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9352 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9353 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9354 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9355 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9356 \leftskip\z@skip 9357 \rightskip\z@skip 9358 \spaceskip\z@skip 9359 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9360 \parindent\defaultparindent 9361 % 9362 \smallfonts \rm 9363 % 9364 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9365 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9366 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9367 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9368 \let\noindent = \relax 9369 % 9370 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9371 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9372 \everypar = {\hang}% 9373 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9374 % 9375 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9376 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9377 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9378 \footstrut 9379 % 9380 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9381 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9382} 9383}%end \catcode `\@=11 9384 9385\def\errfootnotenest{% 9386 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9387 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9388 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9389} 9390 9391\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9392 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9393 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9394} 9395 9396% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9397% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9398% would be lost. 9399% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9400% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9401% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9402% 9403% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9404% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9405% out prematurely. 9406% 9407\def\startsavinginserts{% 9408 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9409 \let\insert\saveinsert 9410 \else 9411 \let\checkinserts\relax 9412 \fi 9413} 9414 9415% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9416% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9417% 9418\def\saveinsert#1{% 9419 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9420 \afterassignment\next 9421 % swallow the left brace 9422 \let\temp = 9423} 9424\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9425\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9426 9427\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9428 9429\def\placesaveins#1{% 9430 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9431 {\box#1}% 9432} 9433 9434% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9435{ 9436 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9437 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9438} 9439 9440% initialization: 9441\def\newsaveins #1{% 9442 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9443 \next 9444} 9445\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9446 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9447 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9448 \checksaveins #1}% 9449} 9450 9451% initialize: 9452\let\checkinserts\empty 9453\newsaveins\footins 9454\newsaveins\margin 9455 9456 9457% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9458% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9459% 9460% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9461% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9462% undone and the next image would fail. 9463\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9464\ifeof 1 \else 9465 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9466 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9467 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9468 \input epsf.tex 9469\fi 9470\closein 1 9471% 9472% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9473\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9474\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9475 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9476 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9477% 9478\def\image#1{% 9479 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9480 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9481 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9482 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9483 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9484 \fi 9485 \else 9486 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9487 \fi 9488} 9489% 9490% Arguments to @image: 9491% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9492% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9493% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9494% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9495% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9496\newif\ifimagevmode 9497\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9498 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9499 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9500 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9501 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9502 \ifvmode 9503 \imagevmodetrue 9504 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9505 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9506 \imagevmodetrue 9507 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9508 \fi\fi 9509 % 9510 \ifimagevmode 9511 \nobreak\medskip 9512 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9513 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9514 % above and below. 9515 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9516 \nobreak 9517 \fi 9518 % 9519 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9520 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9521 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9522 % normal paragraph indentation. 9523 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9524 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9525 % eradicate the centering. 9526 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9527 % 9528 % Output the image. 9529 \ifpdf 9530 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9531 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9532 \else 9533 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9534 % For epsf.tex 9535 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9536 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9537 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9538 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9539 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9540 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9541 \else 9542 % For XeTeX 9543 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9544 \fi 9545 \fi 9546 % 9547 \ifimagevmode 9548 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9549 \fi 9550 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9551\endgroup} 9552 9553 9554% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9555% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9556% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9557% 9558\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9559 9560% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9561\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9562 9563% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9564% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9565% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9566% 9567% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9568% be referable. 9569% 9570% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9571% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9572% 9573% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9574% chapter-level command. 9575\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9576% 9577\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9578 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9579 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9580 % 9581 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9582 % 9583 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9584 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9585 % 9586 \startsavinginserts 9587 % 9588 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9589 \par 9590 % 9591 \vtop\bgroup 9592 \def\floattype{#1}% 9593 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9594 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9595 % 9596 \ifx\floattype\empty 9597 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9598 \else 9599 {% 9600 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9601 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9602 \indexnofonts 9603 \turnoffactive 9604 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9605 }% 9606 \fi 9607 % 9608 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9609 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9610 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9611 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9612 % 9613 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9614 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9615 % 9616 {% 9617 % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the 9618 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9619 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9620 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9621 % lists of floats. 9622 % 9623 \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9624 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9625 }% 9626 \fi 9627 % 9628 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9629 \vskip\parskip 9630 % 9631 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9632 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9633} 9634 9635% we have these possibilities: 9636% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9637% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9638% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9639% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9640% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9641% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9642% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9643% @float & no caption: 9644% 9645\def\Efloat{% 9646 \let\floatident = \empty 9647 % 9648 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9649 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9650 % 9651 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9652 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9653 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9654 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9655 \fi 9656 % the number. 9657 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9658 \fi 9659 % 9660 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9661 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9662 \let\captionline = \floatident 9663 % 9664 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9665 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9666 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9667 \fi 9668 % 9669 % caption text. 9670 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9671 \fi 9672 % 9673 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9674 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9675 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9676 \vskip.5\parskip 9677 \captionline 9678 % 9679 % Space below caption. 9680 \vskip\parskip 9681 \fi 9682 % 9683 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9684 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9685 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9686 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9687 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9688 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9689 {% 9690 \requireauxfile 9691 \atdummies 9692 % 9693 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9694 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9695 \else 9696 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9697 \fi 9698 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9699 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9700 }% 9701 \fi 9702 \egroup % end of \vtop 9703 % 9704 \checkinserts 9705} 9706 9707% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9708% 9709\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9710 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9711} 9712 9713% @caption, @shortcaption 9714% 9715\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9716\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9717\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9718\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9719 9720% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9721% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9722\def\getfloatno#1{% 9723 \ifx#1\relax 9724 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9725 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9726 % 9727 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9728 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9729 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9730 \fi 9731 \let\floatno#1% 9732} 9733 9734% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9735% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9736% first read the @float command. 9737% 9738\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9739 9740% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9741% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9742\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9743 9744% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9745% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9746% \currentsection value which we \setref above. 9747% 9748\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9749% 9750% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9751% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9752% 9753\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9754 \def\temp{#1}% 9755 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9756 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9757} 9758 9759% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9760% 9761\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9762 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9763 {% 9764 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9765 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9766 \indexnofonts 9767 \turnoffactive 9768 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9769 }% 9770 % 9771 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9772 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9773 \ifhavexrefs 9774 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9775 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9776 \fi 9777 \else 9778 \begingroup 9779 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9780 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9781 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9782 \endgroup 9783 \fi 9784} 9785 9786% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9787% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9788% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9789% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9790% 9791% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9792% they won't appear in the aux file). 9793% 9794\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9795\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9796 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9797 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9798 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9799 % in pdf output. 9800 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9801 % 9802 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9803 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9804 \writeentry 9805}} 9806 9807 9808\message{localization,} 9809 9810% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9811% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9812% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9813% 9814{ 9815 \catcode`\_ = \active 9816 \globaldefs=1 9817\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9818 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9819 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9820 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9821 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9822 \ifeof 1 9823 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9824 \else 9825 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9826 \input txi-#1.tex 9827 \fi 9828 \closein 1 9829 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9830} 9831% 9832% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9833% try txi-de.tex. 9834% 9835\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9836 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9837 \ifeof 1 9838 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9839 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9840 \else 9841 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9842 \input txi-#1.tex 9843 \fi 9844 \closein 1 9845} 9846}% end of special _ catcode 9847% 9848\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9849is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9850directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9851 9852% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9853% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9854% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9855% 9856% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9857% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9858% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9859% 9860% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9861% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9862% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9863% accented characters problem.) 9864% 9865\catcode`@=11 9866\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9867 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9868 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9869 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9870 \else 9871 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9872 \fi 9873 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9874 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9875 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9876} 9877 9878% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9879% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9880% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9881% 9882\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9883\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9884 9885\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9886 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9887 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9888 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9889 \else 9890 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9891 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9892 \fi 9893\else 9894 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9895 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9896\fi 9897 9898% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9899% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9900% 9901\def\setbytewiseio{% 9902 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9903 \else 9904 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9905 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9906 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9907 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9908 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9909 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9910 \fi 9911 9912 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9913 \else 9914 \directlua{ 9915 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9916 local function convert_char (char) 9917 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9918 end 9919 9920 local function convert_line (line) 9921 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9922 end 9923 9924 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9925 9926 local function convert_line_out (line) 9927 local line_out = "" 9928 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9929 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9930 end 9931 return line_out 9932 end 9933 9934 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9935 } 9936 \fi 9937 9938 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9939} 9940 9941 9942% Helpers for encodings. 9943% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9944% 9945\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9946 \count255=128 9947 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9948 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9949 \advance\count255 by 1 9950 \repeat 9951} 9952 9953\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9954 \count255=128 9955 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9956 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9957 \advance\count255 by 1 9958 \repeat 9959} 9960 9961% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9962% according to the specified encoding. 9963% 9964\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9965\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9966 % 9967 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9968 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9969 % 9970 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9971 % to compare them with \ifx. 9972 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9973 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9974 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9975 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9976 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9977 % 9978 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9979 \asciichardefs 9980 % 9981 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9982 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9983 \setbytewiseio 9984 \fi 9985 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9986 \lattwochardefs 9987 % 9988 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9989 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9990 \setbytewiseio 9991 \fi 9992 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9993 \latonechardefs 9994 % 9995 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9996 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9997 \setbytewiseio 9998 \fi 9999 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10000 \latninechardefs 10001 % 10002 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 10003 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10004 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 10005 \nativeunicodechardefs 10006 \else 10007 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 10008 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10009 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 10010 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 10011 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 10012 % sufficient. 10013 \fi 10014 % 10015 \else 10016 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 10017 % 10018 \fi % utfeight 10019 \fi % latnine 10020 \fi % latone 10021 \fi % lattwo 10022 \fi % ascii 10023 % 10024 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 10025 \else 10026 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 10027 \else 10028 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 10029 \else 10030 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 10031 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 10032 \fi 10033 \fi 10034 \fi 10035} 10036 10037% emacs-page 10038% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 10039% the default font encoding (OT1). 10040% 10041\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 10042 10043% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 10044\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 10045 10046% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 10047% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 10048% macros containing the character definitions. 10049\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10050% 10051 10052\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 10053\gdef#1{% 10054 \ifpassthroughchars 10055 \string#1% 10056 \else 10057 #2% 10058 \fi 10059}} 10060 10061% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 10062\def\latonechardefs{% 10063 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10064 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 10065 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 10066 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 10067 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 10068 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 10069 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 10070 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10071 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10072 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 10073 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 10074 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 10075 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 10076 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10077 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 10078 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 10079 % 10080 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 10081 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 10082 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 10083 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 10084 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10085 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 10086 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 10087 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 10088 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10089 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 10090 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 10091 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 10092 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 10093 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 10094 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 10095 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10096 % 10097 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10098 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10099 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10100 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10101 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10102 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10103 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10104 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10105 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10106 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10107 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10108 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10109 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10110 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10111 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10112 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10113 % 10114 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10115 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10116 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10117 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10118 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10119 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10120 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10121 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10122 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10123 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10124 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10125 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10126 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10127 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10128 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10129 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10130 % 10131 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10132 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10133 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10134 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10135 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10136 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10137 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10138 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10139 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10140 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10141 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10142 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10143 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10144 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10145 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10146 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10147 % 10148 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10149 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10150 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10151 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10152 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10153 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10154 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10155 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10156 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10157 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10158 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10159 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10160 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10161 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10162 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10163 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10164} 10165 10166% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10167\def\latninechardefs{% 10168 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10169 \latonechardefs 10170 % 10171 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10172 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10173 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10174 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10175 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10176 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10177 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10178 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10179} 10180 10181% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10182\def\lattwochardefs{% 10183 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10184 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10185 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10186 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10187 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10188 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10189 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10190 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10191 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10192 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10193 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10194 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10195 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10196 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10197 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10198 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10199 % 10200 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10201 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10202 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10203 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10204 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10205 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10206 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10207 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10208 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10209 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10210 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10211 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10212 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10213 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10214 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10215 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10216 % 10217 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10218 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10219 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10220 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10221 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10222 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10223 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10224 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10225 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10226 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10227 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10228 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10229 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10230 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10231 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10232 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10233 % 10234 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10235 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10236 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10237 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10238 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10239 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10240 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10241 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10242 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10243 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10244 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10245 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10246 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10247 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10248 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10249 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10250 % 10251 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10252 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10253 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10254 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10255 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10256 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10257 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10258 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10259 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10260 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10261 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10262 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10263 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10264 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10265 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10266 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10267 % 10268 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10269 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10270 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10271 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10272 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10273 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10274 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10275 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10276 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10277 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10278 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10279 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10280 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10281 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10282 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10283 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10284} 10285 10286% UTF-8 character definitions. 10287% 10288% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10289% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10290% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10291% 10292\newcount\countUTFx 10293\newcount\countUTFy 10294\newcount\countUTFz 10295 10296\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10297 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10298% 10299\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10300 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10301% 10302\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10303 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10304 10305\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10306 \ifx #1\relax 10307 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10308 \else 10309 \expandafter #1% 10310 \fi 10311} 10312 10313% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10314\begingroup 10315 \catcode`\~13 10316 \catcode`\$12 10317 \catcode`\"12 10318 10319 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10320 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10321 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10322 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10323 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10324 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10325 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10326 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10327 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10328 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10329 \fi} 10330 10331 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10332 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10333 \countUTFx = "80 10334 \countUTFy = "C2 10335 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10336 \gdef~{% 10337 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10338 \UTFviiiLoop 10339 10340 \countUTFx = "C2 10341 \countUTFy = "E0 10342 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10343 \gdef~{% 10344 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10345 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10346 \UTFviiiLoop 10347 10348 \countUTFx = "E0 10349 \countUTFy = "F0 10350 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10351 \gdef~{% 10352 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10353 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10354 \UTFviiiLoop 10355 10356 \countUTFx = "F0 10357 \countUTFy = "F4 10358 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10359 \gdef~{% 10360 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10361 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10362 }}% 10363 \UTFviiiLoop 10364\endgroup 10365 10366\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10367 10368% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10369\def\U#1{% 10370 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10371 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10372 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10373 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10374 % letters are missing. 10375 \begingroup 10376 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10377 \uppercase{.} 10378 \endgroup 10379 \else 10380 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10381 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10382 \fi 10383 \else 10384 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10385 \fi 10386} 10387 10388% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10389% sequence to be defined. 10390\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10391 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10392\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10393 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10394\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10395 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10396 10397% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10398% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10399% this gets used by the @U command 10400% 10401\begingroup 10402 \catcode`\"=12 10403 \catcode`\<=12 10404 \catcode`\.=12 10405 \catcode`\,=12 10406 \catcode`\;=12 10407 \catcode`\!=12 10408 \catcode`\~=13 10409 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10410 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10411 \begingroup 10412 \parseXMLCharref 10413 10414 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10415 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10416 % 10417 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10418 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10419 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10420 % 10421 \expandafter\expandafter 10422 \expandafter\expandafter 10423 \expandafter\expandafter 10424 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10425 % 10426 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10427 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10428 \fi 10429 % 10430 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10431 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10432 \endgroup} 10433 % 10434 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10435 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10436 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10437 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10438 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10439 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10440 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10441 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10442 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10443 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10444 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10445 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10446 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10447 \else 10448 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10449 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10450 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10451 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10452 \fi\fi\fi 10453 } 10454 10455 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10456 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10457 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10458 % of the bytes. 10459 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10460 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10461 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10462 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10463 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10464 10465 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10466 % in order to get the last five bits. 10467 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10468 10469 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10470 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10471 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10472 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10473 10474 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10475 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10476 % sequence. 10477 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10478 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10479 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10480 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10481 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10482 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10483 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10484 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10485\endgroup 10486 10487% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10488% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10489% 10490\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10491 \catcode"#1=\other 10492} 10493 10494% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10495% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10496% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10497% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10498% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10499% 10500% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10501% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10502% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10503% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10504% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10505% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10506% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10507% 10508\def\unicodechardefs{% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10525 % 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10542 % 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10559 % 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10576 % 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10593 % 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10610 % 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10627 % 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10644 % 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10661 % 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10678 % 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10695 % 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10712 % 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10729 % 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10746 % 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10759 % 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10765 % 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10772 % 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10785 % 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10788 % 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10795 % 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10799 % 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}% 10801 % 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10803 % 10804 % Greek letters upper case 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10822 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10830 % 10831 % Vowels with accents 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10838 % 10839 % Standalone accent 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10841 % 10842 % Greek letters lower case 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10868 % 10869 % More Greek vowels with accents 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10875 % 10876 % Variant Greek letters 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10880 % 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10893 % 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10896 % 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10905 % 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10918 % 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10929 % 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10940 % 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10951 % 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10956 % 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10973 % 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10984 % 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10987 % 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10992 % 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10997 % 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 11000 % 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 11004 % 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 11007 % 11008 % Punctuation 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 11024 % 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 11026 % 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 11029 % 11030 % Mathematical symbols 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 11045 % 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 11069 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 11070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 11072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 11073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 11074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 11075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 11076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 11077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 11078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 11079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 11080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 11081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 11082 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 11083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 11084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 11085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 11086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 11087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 11088 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 11089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 11090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 11091 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 11092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 11093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 11094 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 11095 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 11096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 11097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11104 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11108 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11111 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11115 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11118 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11121 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11122 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11124 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11125 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11126 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11127 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11128 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11129 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11130 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11131 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11132 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11133 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11134 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11135 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11136 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11137 % 11138 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11139 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11140 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11141 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11142 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11143 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11144 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11145 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11146 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11147 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11148 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11149 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11150 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11151 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11152 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11153 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11154 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11155 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11156 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11157 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11158 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11159 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11160 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11161 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11162 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11163 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11164 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11165 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11166 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11167 % 11168 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11169 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11170}% end of \unicodechardefs 11171 11172% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11173% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11174\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11175 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11176 \unicodechardefs 11177} 11178 11179% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11180% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11181% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11182% printing the correct glyphs. 11183\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11184\passthroughcharsfalse 11185 11186% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11187% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11188% 11189\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11190 \catcode"#1=\active 11191 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11192 \begingroup 11193 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11194 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11195 \ifpassthroughchars 11196 ##1% 11197 \else 11198 ##3% 11199 \fi 11200 } 11201 \endgroup 11202 } 11203 \begingroup 11204 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11205 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11206 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11207 \endgroup 11208} 11209 11210% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11211% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11212\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11213 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11214 \unicodechardefs 11215} 11216 11217% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11218% make the character token expand 11219% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11220\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11221 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11222 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11223} 11224 11225% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11226\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11227 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11228 \unicodechardefs 11229} 11230 11231% US-ASCII character definitions. 11232\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11233 \relax 11234} 11235 11236% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default 11237% input encoding and allows @U to work. 11238\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11239 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11240\else 11241 \utfeightchardefs 11242\fi 11243 11244\message{formatting,} 11245 11246\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11247 11248\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11249\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11250\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11251 11252% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11253\vbadness = 10000 11254 11255% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11256\hbadness = 6666 11257 11258% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11259\widowpenalty=10000 11260\clubpenalty=10000 11261 11262% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11263% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11264% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11265% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11266% 11267\def\setemergencystretch{% 11268 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11269 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11270 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11271 \else 11272 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11273 \fi 11274} 11275 11276% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11277% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11278% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11279% 11280% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11281% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11282% 11283\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11284 \voffset = #3\relax 11285 \topskip = #6\relax 11286 \splittopskip = \topskip 11287 % 11288 \vsize = #1\relax 11289 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11290 \outervsize = \vsize 11291 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11292 \txipageheight = \vsize 11293 % 11294 \hsize = #2\relax 11295 \outerhsize = \hsize 11296 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11297 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11298 % 11299 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11300 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11301 % 11302 \ifpdf 11303 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11304 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11305 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11306 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11307 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11308 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11309 \else 11310 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11311 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11312 \else 11313 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11314 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11315 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11316 \fi 11317 \fi 11318 % 11319 \setleading{\textleading} 11320 % 11321 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11322 \setemergencystretch 11323} 11324 11325% @letterpaper (the default). 11326\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11327 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11328 \textleading = 13.2pt 11329 % 11330 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11331 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11332 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11333 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11334 {11in}{8.5in}% 11335}} 11336 11337% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11338\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11339 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11340 \textleading = 12pt 11341 % 11342 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11343 {-.2in}{0in}% 11344 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11345 {9.25in}{7in}% 11346 % 11347 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11348 \tolerance = 700 11349 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11350 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11351}} 11352 11353% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11354% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11355\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11356 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11357 \textleading = 12pt 11358 % 11359 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11360 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11361 {0pt}{14pt}% 11362 {9in}{6in}% 11363 % 11364 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11365 \tolerance = 700 11366 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11367 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11368}} 11369 11370% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11371\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11372 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11373 \textleading = 13.2pt 11374 % 11375 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11376 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11377 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11378 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11379 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11380 % your texinfo source file like this: 11381 % @tex 11382 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11383 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11384 % @end tex 11385 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11386 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11387 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11388 {297mm}{210mm}% 11389 % 11390 \tolerance = 700 11391 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11392 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11393}} 11394 11395% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11396% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11397% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11398\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11399 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11400 \textleading = 12.5pt 11401 % 11402 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11403 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11404 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11405 {210mm}{148mm}% 11406 % 11407 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11408 \tolerance = 800 11409 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11410 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11411 \tableindent = 12mm 11412}} 11413 11414% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11415\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11416 \afourpaper 11417 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11418 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11419 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11420 {297mm}{210mm}% 11421 % 11422 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11423 \globaldefs = 0 11424}} 11425 11426% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11427\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11428 \afourpaper 11429 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11430 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11431 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11432 {297mm}{210mm}% 11433 \globaldefs = 0 11434}} 11435 11436% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11437% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11438% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11439% 11440\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11441\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11442 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11443 \globaldefs = 1 11444 % 11445 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11446 \setleading{\textleading}% 11447 % 11448 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11449 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11450 \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page 11451 % 11452 \dimen2 = \hsize 11453 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11454 \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page 11455 % 11456 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11457 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11458 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11459 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11460}} 11461 11462% Set default to letter. 11463% 11464\letterpaper 11465 11466% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11467\hfuzz = 1pt 11468 11469 11470\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11471 11472\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11473 11474% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11475\catcode`\^^? = 14 11476 11477% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11478\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11479\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11480\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11481\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11482\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11483\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11484\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11485\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11486\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11487 11488% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11489% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11490% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11491% 11492% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11493% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11494% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11495% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11496% 11497\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11498 11499% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11500% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11501% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11502% this is not a problem. 11503\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11504 11505% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11506 11507% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11508% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11509% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11510% 11511\catcode`\"=\active 11512\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11513\let"=\activedoublequote 11514\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11515\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11516\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11517 11518\catcode`\_=\active 11519\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11520\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11521\let\realunder=_ 11522 11523\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11524 11525\chardef \less=`\< 11526\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11527\chardef \gtr=`\> 11528\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11529\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11530\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11531\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11532 11533 11534% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11535% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11536\def\texinfochars{% 11537 \let< = \activeless 11538 \let> = \activegtr 11539 \let~ = \activetilde 11540 \let^ = \activehat 11541 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11542 \let\b = \strong 11543 \let\i = \smartitalic 11544 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11545} 11546 11547% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11548% parsing them. 11549\def\turnoffactive{% 11550 \normalturnoffactive 11551 \otherbackslash 11552} 11553 11554\catcode`\@=0 11555 11556% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11557% as in \char`\\. 11558\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11559 11560% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. 11561{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} 11562 11563% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11564% in fixed width font. 11565\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11566 11567% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11568% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11569% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11570% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11571% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11572% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11573% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11574% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11575 11576@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11577@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11578 11579% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11580% catcode other. 11581@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11582 11583% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11584% the literal character `\'. 11585% 11586{@catcode`- = @active 11587 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11588 @passthroughcharstrue 11589 @let-=@normaldash 11590 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11591 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11592 @let+=@normalplus 11593 @let<=@normalless 11594 @let>=@normalgreater 11595 @let^=@normalcaret 11596 @let_=@normalunderscore 11597 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11598 @let~=@normaltilde 11599 @let\=@ttbackslash 11600 @markupsetuplqdefault 11601 @markupsetuprqdefault 11602 @unsepspaces 11603 } 11604} 11605 11606% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11607% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11608% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11609@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11610 11611% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11612% 11613% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11614% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11615% a backslash. 11616% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11617% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11618% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11619% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11620{ 11621@catcode`@^=7 11622@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11623 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11624 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11625 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11626 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11627 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11628 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11629 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11630 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11631 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11632 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11633}} 11634 11635{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11636@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11637 11638% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11639% appears by mistake. 11640{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11641@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11642 @gdef^^M{% 11643 @par% 11644 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11645}}} 11646 11647 11648@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11649 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11650 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11651 @enableemergencynewline 11652 @let@c=@comment 11653 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11654 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11655 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11656 @catcode`+=@active 11657 @catcode`@_=@active 11658 % 11659 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11660 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11661 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11662 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11663 % file for Texinfo. 11664 % 11665 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11666 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11667 @closein 1 11668} 11669 11670 11671% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11672@escapechar = `@@ 11673 11674% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11675% active definitions as the normal characters. 11676@def@normaldot{.} 11677@def@normalquest{?} 11678@def@normalslash{/} 11679 11680% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11681% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11682@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11683@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11684@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11685 11686@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11687 11688@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11689@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11690@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11691@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11692@catcode`@'=@active 11693@catcode`@`=@active 11694@markupsetuplqdefault 11695@markupsetuprqdefault 11696 11697@c Local variables: 11698@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp) 11699@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11700@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11701@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11702@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11703@c End: 11704 11705@c vim:sw=2: 11706 11707@enablebackslashhack 11708
